AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD ANSI B7.

1-2000

American National Standard

Safety Requirements for

the Use, Care and Protec-
tion of Abrasive Wheels

1 Scope and definitions

1.1 Scope
This safety standard sets forth requirements
for the safe use, care and protection of abra-
sive wheels and the machines for which they
are designed. Included in this standard are
the requirements for safety guards, flanges,
chucks and proper storage, handling and
mounting techniques.
Exclusions from this standard are natural sand-
stone, pulpstone and coated abrasive prod-
ucts. This standard also does not apply to
machines using loose abrasives.
1.2 Definitions
1.2.1 abrasive wheel/grinding wheel:* An E 1.2.1 abrasive wheel/grinding wheel
abrasive wheel is a grinding tool consisting of
abrasive grains held together by organic or
inorganic bonds. Diamond and reinforced
wheels are included under this definition.
1.2.2 actuating controls: Operator controls
used to initiate machine motion (see trip).
1.2.3 arbor: A shaft, mandrel, spindle or axle.
1.2.4 barrier: A physical boundary to a hazard.
1.2.5 base [frame] [head] [housing] [stand]: Illustration 1 – Examples of the various types
The basic and primary structure of the ma- of abrasive wheels included in this standard
chine.
1.2.6 blade tensioning: Steel centered su- E 1.2.6 blade tensioning
per abrasive cut-off wheels are "tensioned"
Various residual stresses are imparted to the
when manufactured to neutralize the residual
wheel's steel center during manufacture of
stresses within the steel center so that the
steel, during manufacture of the wheel center
wheels will run true at the speed for which
and during manufacture of the wheel itself.
they are intended.
These stresses tend not to be evenly distrib-
uted throughout the core. Therefore, in opera-
tion, the wheel tends to not run true, i.e. it
*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9. tends to wobble or flutter.

1
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.7 blotters: Compressible discs or wash-
ers usually of blotting paper stock, plastic,
cardboard or gasket material, used between
the wheel and flanges when mounting. See
section 5.6.

1.2.8 bushing, reducing: See reducing bush-

ings.
1.2.9 center: A part that supports a workpiece
on its axis of rotation.

1.2.10 chuck: A fixture designed to hold

abrasive segments or certain types of abra-
sive wheels and is mounted on a machine
spindle or machine face plate.

1.2.11 coated abrasive tool:* A coated abra-

sive tool consists of a layer of abrasive par-
ticles firmly attached to a paper, cloth or fiber
backing, or other flexible bonding material by
means of a bonding agent.
1.2.12 collet (collet chuck): A holder for
gripping a workpiece or tool.

1.2.13 component: A constituent part.

1.2.14 configuration: A functional arrange-

ment.
1.2.15 control, operator: An operator acti-
vated push button, switch, lever, hand wheel
or other device that initiates, cycles, controls
or stops motion of the machine.

1.2.16 control system: Sensors, manual in-

put and mode selection elements, interlocking
and decision-making circuitry and output ele-
ments to the machine operating devices and
mechanisms.

1.2.17 coolant: A fluid that is directed on the

material or a workpiece and tool to dissipate
heat and to provide lubrication for the cutting
process (machining process) (material removal
process).
1.2.18 cover, movable: An attachment that
shields the opening of the work station, but
can be moved to provide access.

1.2.19 design: Develop and plan machine

construction to meet the intended purpose
and function.

*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

2
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.20 device: A piece of equipment or a
mechanism designed to serve a special pur-
pose or perform a special function. (See de-
vice, safety.)
1.2.21 device, auxiliary: A device that by
itself does not safeguard hazards but is re-
quired to ensure the proper operation of the
safeguarding (guards, safety devices or meth-
ods).
1.2.22 device, safety: A means that detects
or prevents inadvertent access to a hazard
(see safeguarding).
1.2.23 discrete parts or assemblies: Sepa-
rate or distinct units or elements that are
considered output or work in progress of an
industrial machine or manufacturing system.
1.2.24 dressing:* Dressing is the process of
removing bond material from around the cut-
ting grains or diamonds in order to expose
new, sharp cutting edges and to provide chip
clearance for the material removal process.
(See truing.)
1.2.25 enclosure, additional: Additional en-
closure is protection which isolates the opera-
tion from people in the surrounding area. (See
splash shield.)
1.2.26 exhaust zone: The effective area of
the ventilation system used for control of dust
and fumes.
1.2.27 flanges: Flanges are collars, discs or
plates between or against which wheels are
mounted and are referred to as adaptor, sleeve,
straight relieved or straight unrelieved types.
1.2.28 frame: See base.
1.2.29 grind cycle: The period of time, either
continuous or intermittent, during which the
grinding tool is engaged to remove material
from the workpiece.
1.2.30 grinding machine:* A grinding ma-
chine, designed primarily for metal removal,
presents a grinding tool against a workpiece,
producing a change in shape, size, and sur-
face finish. It may also be used for grinding
material other than metals such as glass, ce-
ramics, plastics, and rubber.

*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

3
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.31 grinding surface or face: The grind- E 1.2.31 grinding surface or face
ing surface or face is the surface of the abra-
sive wheel upon which grinding is properly D
T
performed. GRINDING
SURFACE

1.2.32 grinding tool: See section 1.2.1. H

1.2.33 guard:* A barrier that prevents entry Type 1 straight wheel

into the point of operation or other hazard
area. D GRINDING
SURFACE
W K
1.2.34 guard, adjustable barrier: A guard
with provisions for adjustment to accommo-
date various jobs or tooling setups. E
T
1.2.35 guard, fixed barrier: A guard affixed
to the frame, bolster or other surface in such
a manner so as to enclose all or part of the H
point of operation or other hazard area. J

1.2.36 guard, interlocked: A fixed or mov-

Type 11 flaring-cup wheel
able barrier or section of a barrier interlocked
with the machine control system to (1) prevent Illustration 2 – Grinding
normal machine actuation when the barrier is surfaces are as indicated
open or (2) prevent opening of the barrier or
section of the barrier while the machine is in
motion.
1.2.37 guard, wheel safety: See safety guard,
wheel.
1.2.38 hazard: A condition or set of circum-
stances that can cause physical harm to ex-
posed personnel.
1.2.39 hazardous motion: Motion of equip-
ment or release of energy that poses a haz-
ard.
1.2.40 head: See base.
1.2.41 headstock (horizontal lathe or
grinder): The machine component that houses
one or more spindles on which a chuck, grind-
ing wheel, table, or work holding device is
mounted.
1.2.42 honing tool: A honing tool contains
one or more abrasive tools, mounted in a
holder, that has a provision for moving the
abrasive cutting tools against a workpiece.
1.2.43 housing: See base.

*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

4
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.44 inorganic bonded wheels: Inorganic
wheels are bonded by means of inorganic
material such as clay, glass, porcelain sodium
silicate, magnesium oxychloride, or metal.
Wheels bonded with clay, glass, porcelain or
related ceramic materials are characterized
as “vitrified bonded wheels.”
1.2.45 installer:* An installer is an individual,
partnership or corporation that is responsible
for the placement and preparation for use of a
grinding machine.
1.2.46 integrator: A supplier that designs,
provides, manufactures or assembles a ma-
chine, its associated machines or equipment,
the safeguarding, control interfaces, and in-
terconnections of the control system into a
machine production system. (See supplier.)
1.2.47 interlock: A means or device that
allows a hazardous condition to exist only when
a predetermined set of conditions is met.
1.2.48 machine cycle:* A machine cycle is
the period of time that encompasses the grind
cycle and all other machine functions required
in the operation before and after the grind
cycle. Loading and unloading of the part either
manually or automatically may be included in
the cycle.
1.2.49 machine supplier: (a) Any individual,
person, partnership, corporation or other form
of enterprise engaged in the development and/
or manufacture of any type of machine which
uses an abrasive wheel. (b) One who con-
verts, changes or otherwise alters the original
design of such machines.
1.2.50 maintenance: To keep in an existing
state (of repair).
1.2.51 manufacturer:* (a) machine manufac-
turer — Any individual, partnership, corpora-
tion, or other form of enterprise which is en-
gaged in the development, manufacture, or
rebuilding of any type of grinding machine that
falls within the scope of this standard.
(b)wheel manufacturer — Any individual, part-
nership, corporation or other form of enter-
prise which manufacturers any kind of abra-
sive wheel or which alters or repairs, other
than normal truing or dressing, an abrasive
wheel.

*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

5
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.52 mechanism: An arrangement of com-
ponents to accomplish a given function.
1.2.53 modification (modify): To make a
change to the machine/abrasive wheel or sys-
tem that changes its original purpose, func-
tion, intended use, capacity, operation or safe-
guarding requirements.
NOTE: For the purposes of this standard, modi-
fication includes any effects that the change(s)
has on other portions of the machine/abrasive
wheel or system, including safeguarding, not
directly a part of the modification.
1.2.54 modifier: Anyone that changes the
original purpose, intended use, function or
capacity of the machine or system by design
or construction. (See supplier.)
1.2.55 mount down: Wheels marked with the E 1.2.55 mount down
“Mount Down” designation, shall be mounted
By mounting the wheel as indicated it will be
onto the horizontally positioned grinding
located in the same position as used while
spindle with the “Mount Down” mark pointing
being manufactured. This position will ensure
down.
best concentric running accuracy and balance.
This mark is used on grinding wheels that are
not normally dressed before use. Consult indi-
vidual wheel manufacture for complete expla-
nation.
1.2.56 mount up: Wheels marked with the E 1.2.56 mount up
“Mount Up” designation shall be mounted onto
By mounting the wheel as indicated it will be
the horizontally positioned grinding spindle
located in the same position as used while
with the “Mount Up” mark pointing up.
being manufactured. This position will ensure
best concentric running accuracy and balance.
This mark is used on grinding wheels normally
1.2.57 normal operation: The operating con- larger than 14" in diameter that are mounted
dition where the manufacturing system, cell or between flanges on horizontal spindles. Con-
machines and related equipment perform their sult individual wheel manufacture for com-
intended tasks automatically or unattended plete explanation.
with infrequent manual intervention.

1.2.58 nose, spindle: The portion of the

spindle on which are mounted either internal
or external workholding devices such as
chucks.

1.2.59 operator:* An individual who performs

production work and who controls machines.

1.2.60 organic bonded wheels: Wheels that

are bonded by means of organic material such
as resin, rubber, shellac, or other similar bond-
ing agents.

*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

6
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.61 owner: See user.
1.2.62 peripheral member: A peripheral mem-
ber is the front portion of a self closing guard
on a floorstand grinder. See illustration 51,
page 60.
1.2.63 personnel, instructed: Personnel who are
instructed in the performance of a specific task(s).
1.2.64 personnel, skilled: Personnel with
technical knowledge or sufficient experience
to recognize potential hazards involved in the
performance of their assigned task(s).
1.2.65 pin, drive: A dowel, secured to the
fixed or inner flange, of sufficient length to
extend through a corresponding clearance hole
in the abrasive and/or diamond saw blade and
into the outer flange.
1.2.66 point of operation:* A point of opera-
tion is the area of the grinding machine where
material is positioned and work performed by
the grinding tool.
1.2.67 rebuilder (reconstructor): Any indi-
vidual, person, partnership, corporation or
other form of enterprise which restores the
machine or system to its original design, pur-
pose, capacity and function. (See manufac-
turer.)
1.2.68 rebuilding (reconstruction): Restoring
or rebuilding the machine or system to its origi-
nal design, purpose, capacity and function.
NOTE: Rebuilding (reconstruction) involves the
restoration or replacement of major components
of the machine or system and is not considered
a maintenance or repair activity.
1.2.69 reducing bushings: Reducing bush- E 1.2.69 reducing bushings
ings are inserts or devices used to reduce
the hole size in a grinding wheel so that it
can be mounted on a smaller diameter
spindle.

Illustration 3 – One type

of reducing bushing commonly used to
reduce an abrasive wheel hole size
*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

7
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.70 reinforced wheels: The term “rein- E 1.2.70 reinforced wheels
forced,” as applied to abrasive wheels, shall
define a class of organic bonded wheels which
have webbing, fabric or filament that provides
resistance to total breakage at the designated
maximum operating speed should the wheel
become cracked or damaged.

The term “reinforced” does not apply to the

following:
(1) Wheels which have only such additions as
steel rings or steel cup backs.
(2) Wheels with wire or tape winding.
(3) Wheels which have webbing, fabric or fila-
Illustration 4A – Cross section view
ment around the flange area only.
of a wheel with internal reinforcement

1.2.71 repair: To restore by replacing a part

or putting together that which was broken.

1.2.72 revolutions per minute: Revolutions

per minute (RPM) is the number of complete
turns that an abrasive wheel or other rotating
device makes in one minute.

1.2.73 run: The single or continuous cycling

of a machine.

1.2.74 safeguarding: Methods for protection

of personnel from hazards using guards, safety Illustration 4B – Cross section view
devices or safe work procedures. of a wheel with side reinforcement

1.2.75 safety guard, wheel: A safety guard E 1.2.75 safety guard, wheel
is an enclosure designed to restrain the pieces
of the abrasive wheel and furnish protection to
the operator in the event that the wheel is
broken during operation. See section 4, page
50, for full description.

1.2.76 segments:* Segments are abrasive

bodies in various standard shapes that, when
individually chucked in suitable holding mecha-
nisms, form a grinding unit.

1.2.77 setup: The process of adjusting the

machine and the installation and adjustment
of work holding devices or tooling and appro-
Illustration 5 – The safety guard
priate safeguarding to ensure proper and safe
affords operator protection in
operation of the machine.
case of accidental breakage

*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

8
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.78 shall and should: The word “Shall” E 1.2.78 shall and should
where used is to be understood as mandatory,
The sketches and photographs used in this
“Should” as advisory and "May" denotes a
publication are classified as "Figures" or "Il-
permissible course of action within the limits
lustrations." The items listed as "Figures" are
of the standard.
applicable to the standard regulations, while
those listed as "illustrations" apply to the ex-
1.2.79 shield:* A barrier used to keep chips planatory information.
or coolant within the confines of the machine;
a barrier used to reduce the potential of tool-
ing parts or workpieces from being ejected
from the machine.

1.2.80 splash shield: A barrier used to keep

chips or coolant within the confines of the
machine.

1.2.81 spindle: A power-driven shaft-like

member mounted on bearings.

1.2.82 stand: See base.

1.2.83 station, work: The area on the ma-

chine where grinding, cutting-off or honing is
performed.

1.2.84 steel rings: Steel rings are circular E 1.2.84 steel rings
bands of steel usually of round cross section
Steel rings, when used, act mainly to add
which may be incorporated into abrasive
rigidity to the wheel as it approaches discard
wheels by the manufacturer.
size and to help retain the pieces of the wheel
should accidental breakage occur at stub size.
1.2.85 supervised: A means or method where
the user can exercise permissive control over
the operation of the machine.

1.2.86 supervisor: An individual who is au-

thorized by and acts on behalf of the employer
and directs activities of other employees.

1.2.87 supplier: An individual, corporation,

partnership or other legal entity or form of
business. For the purposes of this standard, a
supplier provides, or makes available for use,
all or part of the machine, or wheels. A sup-
plier can be any one of the following entities
such as defined under manufacturer, recon-
structor, modifier, installer and integrator.

*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

9
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.88 surface feet per minute: Surface feet
per minute (SFPM) is the distance in feet any
one abrasive grain on the peripheral surface
of an abrasive wheel travels in one minute.
Surface feet are calculated based on the free
running speed of the machine spindle.
Surface Feet Per Minute =
3.1416 x diameter in inches x RPM
12
or
.262 x diameter in inches x RPM
E 1.2.88 surface feet per minute
Surface feet per minute (SFPM) is the dis-
tance in feet any one abrasive grain on the
cutting surface travels in one minute. In illus-
tration 7 the point “x” on the cutting surface
travels, for every complete turn, a distance
equal to the circumference (3.1416 x diam-
eter). Since the diameter of an abrasive wheel
is usually indicated in inches, it is necessary
to divide the result by 12 in order to obtain the
number of “surface feet per minute.” To con-
vert surface feet per minute (SFPM) to meters
per second (m/sec), use the following table:

Example: 24" diameter wheel, 1000 revo- Conversion Meters/

SFPM ÷ =
lutions per minute Factor Second
6,500 ÷ 196.85 = 33.02
Surface Feet Per Minute = .262 x 24 x 1000 8,500 ÷ 196.85 = 43.18
= 6288 SFPM 9,500 ÷ 196.85 = 48.26
12,500 ÷ 196.85 = 63.50
16,000 ÷ 196.85 = 81.28

1.2.89 tape or wire winding: Tape or wire or conversion formula:

winding used on the periphery of cylinder or SFPM x 0.00508 = m/sec
disc wheels to help retain the pieces of the
wheel should accidental breakage occur.

1.2.90 threaded bushings: Cup back, in- E 1.2.90 threaded bushings

serted type, round knurled and prong anchor
bushings (as shown in illustration 6) are gen-
erally molded on Type 6 and 11 organic bonded
cup wheels.
Bushings of round, square or similar designs
may be cemented or molded into the wheel
holes, including cone and plug wheels.
The full cup back bushings shall, under no
circumstances, be considered a substitute for
a safety guard as defined in section 4.

1.2.91 transmission: The mechanical drive

components, which may include speed chang-
ing means, by which power is transmitted from
the source (driving) to the output (driven)
members. Illustration 6 – Prong anchor, round
knurled and full cup back bushings
1.2.92 traverse, rapid: The lateral movement
of equipment or material.

1.2.93 trip (tripping): The momentary actua-

tion of the machine control or mechanism to
initiate the machine cycle stroke.

10
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.2.94 truing: The process of forming the
abrasive wheel cutting surfaces in order to
eliminate runout; to form the geometrical shape
and to expose new sharp cutting edges of the
abrasive grains (see dressing).
Some truing tools are as follows:
(1) single point diamond
(2) cluster diamond
(3) diamond roll
(4) steel roll
(5) crush roll
1.2.95 unintended operation (actuation):
An inadvertent cycle of the machine not inten-
tionally initiated by the operator.
1.2.96 user:* An entity that utilizes machines,
systems and related equipment.
1.2.97 wheel operating speed: Wheel speed E 1.2.97 wheel operating speed
shall be computed from the free running speed
In table 23, page 99, wheel speeds are classi-
of the machine spindle.
fied in surface feet per minute (SFPM). Ma-
1.2.98 work support or table: The part of the chine spindle speeds, however, are usually
machine on which material or workpieces are indicated in revolutions per minute. Therefore,
positioned. one must have a clear understanding of how
these two are related.
1.2.99 workpiece:* A workpiece is any article
that is altered in shape, size, or surface finish
as a result of contact with an abrasive tool.
1.2.100 zone exhaust system:* A zone or
area exhaust system provides for exhausting
the work area in which a machine or machines
are located. The exhausting may be in the
nature of a downdraft, updraft or backdraft
system for removal and control of particulate

Illustration 7 – Point "X" has traveled

a distance equal to the circumference
of the wheel (3.1416 x diameter)

*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

11
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.3 Usage definitions

1.3.1 ball grinding: The precision grinding of

preformed or “headed” balls using plate
mounted wheels or discs in combination with
rill plates containing ball tracks or grooved
pressure rings.

1.3.2 bench grinder: A bench mounted off-

hand grinding machine with either one or two
wheels mounted on a horizontal spindle.

1.3.3 centerless o.d. grinding: The preci- E 1.3.3 centerless o.d. grinding
sion grinding of the outer surface of cylindrical
workpieces which are rotated and supported
by a regulating wheel or a magnetic chuck and
are resting on a work blade or shoes.

1.3.4 concrete sawing: Cutting or slotting of

concrete, asphalt, or other similar surfaces
where the sawing machine rides upon the
surface being sawed. Illustration 8

1.3.5 contour grinding: Grinding operation

in which the grinding wheel and/or part follows
a machine generated contour.

1.3.6 creep feed grinding: In the creep feed

grinding process, the machine tool plunges a
soft, open structure wheel deep into the work
piece to remove a large amount of material in
one pass.
Creep feed grinding is characterized by a deep
cut at low table speeds and a larger arc of
contact between the grinding surface and the
work piece that is not possible with other
conventional grinding processes. The greater
the depth of cut, the slower the table speed.
Thus the name “creep feed.”

1.3.7 cutting-off: The slicing or parting of E 1.3.7 cutting-off

any material or part.

1.3.8 cylindrical o.d. grinding: The preci-

sion grinding of the outer surface of any cylin-
drical workpiece which is supported at one or
both ends.

1.3.9 floorstand grinder: A floor mounted,

off-hand grinding machine with one or two
wheels, normally 24" or 30" diameter, mounted
on a horizontal spindle to perform snagging
operations such as grinding gates, risers,
flashings, fins and parting lines on castings. Illustration 9

12
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.3.10 internal grinding: The precision grind- E 1.3.10 internal grinding
ing of the inside surface of a hole in a
workpiece.

1.3.11 lapidary: The shaping by cutting-off

and/or grinding of precious or semi-precious
gem-like materials.

Illustration 10 – Internal grinding

1.3.12 masonry cutting: Cutting-off, notch-
of a large bore cylinder
ing or slotting units of brick, tile, block, refrac-
tory shapes or similar materials where the
workpiece is brought to the machine.

1.3.13 off-hand grinding: The grinding of E 1.3.13 off-hand grinding

any material or part which is held in the
operator's hand.

1.3.14 pedestal grinder: An off-hand grind-

ing machine similar to a bench grinder, having
one or two horizontal spindles for the use of
grinding wheels and mounted on or otherwise
attached to a floor mounted pedestal.

Illustration 11 – Bench grinder

used for off-hand grinding

13
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.3.15 pistol grip pneumatic sander: A popu-
lar low cost, high speed, unguarded, light
weight portable tool designed for 5" and smaller
coated abrasive discs.
1.3.16 precision grinding: Grinding opera-
tions performed by machines used to finish
work parts to specified dimensions and finish
requirements.
E 1.3.15 pistol grip pneumatic sander
Most pistol grip pneumatic sanders are rated
for 14,000 to 25,000 rpm @ 90 psi., but due to
the ungoverned design of most, if not all ma-
chines, speeds in excess of the rated speed
are attainable by simply increasing the air
pressure and volume. Mounting systems are
comprised of an inner flange for 5" and smaller
coated abrasive discs with a concave unre-
lieved mounting surface keyed or otherwise
permanently affixed to a direct drive air motor.
The outer flange is designed with a 7/ 8 " diam-
eter pilot and a convex unrelieved mounting
surface. Herein, the danger lies in that 4 1/ 2"
through 9" diameter Type 27 wheels and Type
28 wheels with a 7/ 8" hole can be incorrectly
mounted on these machines. The high speed,
coupled with the lack of a guard, is a recipe for
disaster. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ARE
PISTOL GRIP PNEUMATIC SANDERS TO BE
USED WITH GRINDING WHEELS.

1.3.17 regulating wheel: In centerless grind- E 1.3.17 regulating wheel

ing, the workpiece is introduced between two
wheels, the grinding wheel and the regulating
wheel, both rotating in the same direction but
at different speeds. At the same time, the
workpiece is supported from below by a fixed
work-rest blade. The grinding force compo-
nent acting in the horizontal direction forces
the part against the regulating wheel, which
will control the part rotation. The part will
rotate at the speed of the regulating wheel,
times the ratio of the regulating wheel diam-
eter over the part diameter. Regulating wheels
typically operate at speeds of 10 to 600 RPM. Illustration 12 – A schematic drawing
The regulating wheel controls the rotational of a centerless grinding operation
speed of the workpiece and is not considered showing the relationship between the
a grinding wheel and therefore is not subject abrasive wheel and regulating wheel
to the design limitations associated with a
grinding wheel.

1.3.18 rotary tool (burr) grinding: Forming

“file like” cutting surfaces on steel or carbide,
either mechanically or off-hand.

14
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.3.19 saw gumming: The shaping and/or E 1.3.19 saw gumming
sharpening of saw teeth by grinding.

1.3.20 saws – portable: A machine designed

to be hand-held while performing the functions
of sawing with a circular metal blade or cutting
with a reinforced cutting-off wheel.

1.3.21 slotting: The grinding of a slot or

groove in any material or part.

1.3.22 snagging: Grinding which removes Illustration 13 – Sharpening teeth (saw

relatively large amounts of material without gumming) on a large band saw
regard to close tolerances or surface finish
requirements.

1.3.23 surface grinding: The precision grind-

ing of a plane surface.

1.3.24 tool and cutter grinding: The preci- E 1.3 24 tool and cutter grinding
sion grinding or sharpening of various types of
multi-tooth cutters and single point cutting
tools.

Illustration 14 – Grinding a shell end mill

1.3.25 tuck pointing: Removal by grinding, E 1.3.25 tuck pointing

of cement, mortar or other nonmetallic jointing
material.

Illustration 15 – Tuck pointing using a

reinforced organic bonded abrasive wheel

15
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.3.26 wall sawing: Cutting or slotting of E 1.3.26 wall sawing
concrete, brick, block or other similar surfaces
where the sawing machine rides upon a track
which is securely bolted to the surface being
sawed.

1.3.27 users of wheels and machines: Any

individual, person, partnership, corporation or
other form of enterprise which uses abrasive
wheels and machines.

1.3.28 valve: A device to control the flow of

coolant, grinding fluid or air.

1.3.29 wheel safety guard:* A wheel guard

is an enclosure designed to restrain the pieces
of the abrasive wheel and furnish all possible
protection to personnel in the event that the
wheel is broken in operation.
Illustration 16 – Securely mounted wall saw

1.4 Definitions and limitations of wheel E 1.4 Definitions and limitations of wheel
shapes shapes
The following wheel shape definitions and limi- Using nonstandard wheels can create special
tations are safety standard recommendations problems in mounting, guarding and opera-
for general use and should be used wherever tion. Therefore, it is advisable for the user to
possible. Wheel dimensions or shapes differ- consult the machine builder and the wheel
ing from the standard recommendations below manufacturer for their recommendations. See
may be used on specific machines but shall annex C for key to letter dimensions.
require the approval of the wheel and machine
manufacturer.
1.4.1 Abrasive disc wheels E 1.4.1 Abrasive discs (wheels)
Definition:
A grinding disc or cylinder used in single or
double spindle disc grinders, with a shape
similar to a Type 1 straight wheel or a Type 2
cylinder wheel. The entire front side of the
disc is used for grinding. (See sections 3.9,
page 39 and 3.10, page 41.)
a. Anchor mounted discs These discs are
mounted with bolts or screws to a machine
supporting plate by several means such as,
Illustration 17 – Typical example of the various
types of abrasive discs
*Definition taken from ANSI B11.9.

16
 ANSI B7.1-2000
but not limited to, imbedded nuts and washers
in the back of the disc.
b. Plate mounted discs These discs are
mounted to a machine supporting plate by a
cemented-on steel backplate having tapped
holes and/or projecting studs or other means
for mounting.
1.4.2 Corner clearance (‘C’ dimension)
The corner clearance is defined as the junc-
tion between the inner wall of a recess and the
flat (‘K’ Dimension).
1.4.3 Recess diameter (‘P’ dimension)
The recess diameter is defined as:
P = K + (2 x C)
See illustration 20.

1.4.4 Type 1 straight wheels E 1.4.4 Type 1 straight wheels

Definition: D
T
Type 1 straight wheels have diameter, thick- GRINDING
SURFACE
ness and hole size dimensions and grinding
H
should be performed on the periphery. This
does not preclude their use for applications
such as shoulder contour and form grinding Illustration 18 – Type 1 straight wheel
where it is recognized that a limited amount of Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter, thick-
side grinding will be performed. Extreme cau- ness and hole.
tion should be exercised not to use excessive
side pressure. Type 1 wheels shall be mounted
between equal flanges of the appropriate de-
sign as specified in section 5, page 72.

Limitation:
Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than
two-thirds of the full size wheel diameter di-
mension (D) for precision, cylindrical,
centerless or surface grinding applications.
Maximum hole size for all other applications
should not exceed one-half the wheel diam-
eter. Inorganic wheels used in snagging op-
erations should have a maximum hole size of
not more than one-quarter of the wheel diam-
eter.

17
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.4.5 Type 2 cylinder wheels
Definition:
Type 2 cylinder wheels have diameter, wheel
thickness and rim thickness dimensions. Grind-
ing shall be performed on the rim surface only,
dimension W. Cylinder wheels may be plain,
plate mounted, inserted nut or of the project-
ing stud type.
Limitation:
Rim height, T dimension, is equal to or greater
than rim thickness, W dimension.
1.4.6 Type 5 recessed one side wheels
Definition:
Type 5 recessed one side wheels have diam-
eter, thickness and hole size dimensions and
in addition also have recess diameter and
depth dimensions.
Limitation:
Type 5 wheels are subject to the same limita-
tions of hole size, use and mounting as Type
1 wheels, definition 1.4.4, above, and sec-
tion6, page 87. In addition, recess depth, F
dimension, should not exceed 50% of wheel
thickness, T dimension. The inside flat K di-
mension, shall be large enough to accommo-
date a suitable flange as recommended in
section 5, page 72.
1.4.7 Type 6 straight cup wheels
Definition:
Type 6 cup wheels have diameter, thickness,
hole size, rim thickness and back thickness
dimensions. Grinding should be performed on
rim surface, W dimension.
Limitation:
Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should
not be less than 1/ 4 T dimension. In addition,
when unthreaded hole wheels are specified,
the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large
enough to accommodate a suitable flange.
See flange recommendations, section 5,
page72.
18
E 1.4.5 Type 2 cylinder wheels
D GRINDING
W
SURFACE
T
Illustration 19 – Side grinding wheel having a
diameter, thickness and wall
E 1.4.6 Type 5 recessed one side wheels
D
P
C
K
F
T
E
GRINDING
SURFACE
H
Illustration 20 – Type 5 wheel,
recessed one side
Peripheral grinding wheel having one side straight
or flat and the opposite side recessed. Recessed
wheels allow a wider faced abrasive wheel to be
used when the available mounting thickness (E) is
less than the required overall thickness (T). The
recess allows grinding clearance for the nut and
flange.
E 1.4.7 Type 6 straight cup wheels
D
P
W C GRINDING
K SURFACE
T
E
H
Illustration 21 – Type 6 straight cup wheel
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness
and hole with one side straight or flat and the
opposite side recessed. This type, however, differs
from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the
wall of the abrasive created by the difference be-
tween the diameter of the recess and the outside
diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall thick-
ness "W" takes precedence over the diameter of
the recess as an essential intermediate dimension
to describe this shape type.
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.4.8 Type 7 double recessed wheels E 1.4.8 Type 7 double recessed wheels
Definition:
D
Type 7 double recessed wheels have diam- P
eter, thickness and hole size dimensions and F K
C
in addition also have recess diameters and
E T
depth dimensions.
G C GRINDING
H SURFACE
Limitations: K
Type 7 wheels are subject to the same limita- P
tions of hole size, use and mounting, as Type Illustration 22 – Type 7 wheel,
1 wheels, section 1.4.4, page 17, and sec- recessed two sides
tion 6, page 87. In addition, the combined Peripheral grinding wheels having both sides re-
depth of recess F and G dimensions, should cessed to allow grinding clearance for both flanges
not exceed 50% of wheel thickness, T dimen- or recessed so that unusually wide faced wheels
sion. The inside flat, K dimension, shall be may be mounted when the available mounting thick-
ness (E) is less than the overall thickness (T).
large enough to accommodate a suitable flange
as recommended in section 5, page 72.

1.4.9 Type 11 flaring cup wheels
Definition:
Type 11 flaring cup wheels have double diam-
E 1.4.9 Type 11 flaring cup wheels
D GRINDING
W K
SURFACE

eter dimensions D and J, and in addition, have

thickness, hole size, rim and back thickness
E
dimensions. Grinding should be performed on T
rim surface, W dimension.

Limitation: H
J
Type 11 wheels are subject to all limitations of
use and mounting listed for Type 6 straight Illustration 23 – Type 11 flaring cup wheel
sided cup wheels, definition 1.4.7, and sec- Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered
tion 6, page 87. outward from the back. Wall thickness at the back
is normally greater than at the grinding surface.
Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should
not be less than 1/ 4 T dimension. In addition,
when unthreaded hole wheels are specified,
the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large
enough to accommodate a suitable flange.
See flange recommendations, section 5,
page 72.

19
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.4.10 Type 12 dish wheels
Definition:
Type 12 dish wheels have diameter, thick-
ness, rim thickness and back thickness di-
E 1.4.10 Type 12 dish wheels
D
A GRINDING
K
U SURFACE

mension. In addition, Type 12 wheels always

have a surface thickness, U dimension. Grind- T

ing may be performed on both A and U dimen- E

sions.
Limitation:
Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should
be equal to or greater than 1/ 2 wheel thickness,
T dimension, J and K dimensions shall be
large enough to accommodate a suitable
flange. See flange recommendations, sec-
tion 5, page 72.
H
J
Illustration 24 – Type 12 dish wheel
Side grinding wheel known as a dish, differing from
a Type 11 in that the Type 12 always has a “U”
dimension. The “W” dimension of a Type 11 be-
comes the “A” dimension of a Type 12. The grind-
ing may be performed on both the “A” and “U”
surfaces.

1.4.11 Type 13 saucer wheels E 1.4.11 Type 13 saucer wheels

Definition:
D
U
Type 13 saucer wheels have diameter, thick- K R
ness, hole size and back thickness dimen-
sions. Grinding shall be performed on wheel T
periphery, U dimensions, only.
GRINDING
H SURFACE
Limitation: E
R=
U
2 J
J and K dimensions shall be large enough to
accommodate suitable flanges, see section 5, Illustration 25 – Type 13 saucer wheel
page 72. In addition, wheel thickness shall Peripheral grinding wheel known as a saucer, dif-
always equal E dimension. fering from a Type 12 in that the cross-section is
equal throughout (U=E). The grinding surface is
always half-round with R=U/2.

20
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.4.12 Types 16, 17, 18, 18R and 19 cone E 1.4.12 Types 16, 17, 18, 18R and 19
and plug wheels cone and plug wheels
Definition:
Type 16 cones have a curved side with a nose GRINDING
R1 SURFACE
radius. Type 17 cones have straight sides with GRINDING
SURFACE
R
or without a nose radius. Type 18 and 18R
H D D H
plug wheels are cylindrical in shape with ei-
ther a square or curved grinding end. Type 19 J
B
B
cone wheels are a combination of cone and T
T
plug type shapes and are usually specified Type 16 — Cone, curved side. Type 17 — Cone, straight
side, square tip.
where base dimension D in a Type 17 cone
would not provide an adequate cross section GRINDING SURFACE
R
GRINDING SURFACE

of abrasive. All types of cone and plug wheels

are manufactured with blind hole threaded H D H D
bushings and may be used on all surfaces
except the flat mounting surface D. B
T
B
T

Limitation: Type 18 — Plug, square end. Type 18R — Plug, round end.

Cone and plug type wheels are mounted by GRINDING

SURFACE

being screwed onto a threaded machine

spindle so that surface D seats firmly against D H

an unrelieved, flat back-up flange. (See sec- J

B
tion 3.3.4, page 33.) The maximum volume of S
T
type 16 through 19 cones and plugs shall not
Type 19 — Plug, conical end, square tip.
be greater than 35 cubic inches (example: a 3"
diameter, 5" thick (T) type 18 plug wheel).
Also, the thickness shall not be less than the
base diameter. (Example: a 2" diameter wheel Illustration 26 – Various types of cone and
shall not be less than 2" thick.) plug wheels
Exception:
Valve seat wheels, where the mounting spindle
is an integral part of the pilot used to align the
wheel with the valve seat surface during grind-
ing, need not be mounted as described above.

21
aaa
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.4.13 Types 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26
relieved and/or recessed wheels
Definition:

aaaa
Types 20 through 26 relieved and/or recessed
wheels have diameter, thickness, hole size,
recess diameter and depth dimensions, and in
addition may have tapered relief on one or
both sides.
Limitation:
Types 20 through 26 wheels are subject to the
same limitations of use and mounting as Type1
wheels, definition 1.4.4, page 17 and sec-
tion 6, page 87.
Tapered relief depths shall be considered as
recesses and added to straight recess depth
or depths for determination of total wheel re-
cess depth. Total recess depths should not
exceed 50% of wheel thickness, T dimension.
Dimension K shall be large enough to accom-
modate a suitable flange as recommended in
section 5, page 72.

1.4.14 Types 27 and 28 depressed center

wheels
Definition:
*

*E
E
E

F
N

N
aaa
E 1.4.13 Types 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26
relieved and/or recessed wheels

G
A

A
H

*
H
D

E
K

F
SURFACE

G
O
GRINDING
SURFACE
Type 20 — Wheel, relieved one side.

GRINDING

Type 22 — Wheel, relieved Kone side, recessed other side.

Illustration 27 – Various types of relieved

and/or recessed wheels
*For details of relationship between "P" (recess
diameter) and "K" (inside flat) see illustration 20,
page 18.

E 1.4.14 Types 27 and 28 depressed cen-

ter wheels
GRINDING
SURFACE

Type 24 — Wheel, relieved and recessed

one side, recessed other side.

A
T

H
K
E

D
K
E

F N

F
N

N
O

GRINDING
SURFACE
A
A

Type 26 — Wheel, relieved and recessed both sides.

T
H
K

H
K
D

GRINDING
SURFACE

Type 21 — Wheel, relieved two sides.

GRINDING
SURFACE H
D
K

Type 23 — Wheel, relieved and recessed same side.

GRINDING
SURFACE

Type 25 — Wheel, relieved and recessed

one side, relieved other side.
T

T
*

Types 27 and 28, depressed center wheels, D

U
have diameter, thickness and hole size di- GRINDING K
SURFACE
mensions. Both types are reinforced, organic
bonded wheels having depressed centers
which permit grinding without interference with H
E O
the mounting. U=E Y
Type 27
Type 27 wheels are manufactured with flat
grinding rims or faces and are designed for D U
side grinding, when used at a slight angle to GRINDING
SURFACE K
the workpiece, or peripheral grinding, includ-
ing small cutting-off and shallow notching op-
erations. When grinding masonry and con- H V1
E
crete surfaces, such as ceilings and walls, O Y
they may be used flat. Such wheels have J U=E

deeper than normal depressed centers for flat Type 28

blending.
Type 28 wheels have saucer-shaped grinding
rims and are designed for corner grinding and
side grinding, and shall not be used for cut-
ting-off or notching operations.
Illustration 28 – Types 27 and 28 wheels,
depressed center
Wheels are generally used on right angle head
portable grinders.

22
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Limitation:
Special supporting, back adaptor and inside
flange nuts are required for the proper mount-
ing of these types of wheels, see section 6.15,
page 96.
Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the
manufacturer may not require an inside nut
and shall not be reused.
It is the user/owner's responsibility to ensure
wheels with this type mount fit inside the guard
according to section 4.
1.4.15 Type 27 abrasive flap disc wheels E 1.4.15 Type 27 abrasive flap disc wheels
Construction consists of a reinforced organic GRINDING
bonded wheel shape with a depressed center SURFACE

metal reinforced arbor hole. Grinding portion

consists of abrasive coated cloth pieces which
are layered and glued on the peripheral por-
tion of the bottom side. Illustration 29 – Type 27 abrasive flap disc
wheels, tapered and flat grinding surfaces
Common shapes have flat and tapered lay-
ered coated abrasive grinding surfaces.
1.4.16 Type 27A depressed center wheels E 1.4.16 Type 27A depressed center
wheels
Definition:
Type 27A depressed center, cutting-off wheels
have diameter, thickness and hole size di-
mensions. They are reinforced, organic
bonded, offset hub type wheels, usually 16"
diameter and larger, specially designed for
use on cutting-off machines where mounting
nut or outer flange interference cannot be
tolerated.
Limitation:
See section 5.1, page 72, and illustration 30
for mounting details.

Illustration 30 – Type 27A wheel showing

typical mounting details

1.4.17 Type 29 wheels E 1.4.17 Type 29 wheels

Definition: D
H
Type 29 grinding wheels have reversed sau- Grinding
cer shaped grinding rims and are designed for Surface
blending (stock removal which leaves a smooth U
finish). They shall not be used for cutting off or
notching applications. K
Illustration 31 – Type 29 wheels

23
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.4.18 Cutting-off wheels E 1.4.18 Cutting-off wheels
Definition: (a) Wheels with webbing, fabric or filament
around the flange area only are classified as
Cutting-off wheels have diameter, thickness,
non-reinforced wheels. Non-reinforced cutting-
and hole size dimensions. They may be metal
off wheels are intended for use on standard
or organic bonded abrasives of the non-rein-
speed machines where the cutting plane is
forced, reinforced, heavily reinforced or metal
controlled and the workpiece is secured to
center type.
prevent movement. Non-reinforced cutting-off
(a) Non-reinforced cutting-off wheels are de- wheels are not designed for use on portable
signed to withstand only centrifugal, radial machines.
and tangential cutting forces in the plane of
(b) Reinforced cutting-off wheels may be used
the wheel.
on the same applications as non-reinforced
(b) Reinforced cutting-off wheels are strong wheels as well as other standard speed low
in the plane of the wheel and are better able to horsepower applications where the cutting
withstand some lateral and twisting forces. plane is not fixed such as hand-held portable
electric saws and grinders.
(c) Heavily reinforced wheels have greater
amounts of reinforcement than category (b) (c) Typical applications for heavily reinforced
and are intended for use on heavy duty, high cutting-off wheels are swing frame or locked-
speed applications where the cutting plane is down-head-chop saws and especially high-
not fixed. speed gasoline powered saws.
(d) Metal centered wheels may be used on (d) Metal centered cutting-off wheels may be
any of the aforementioned cutting-off opera- steel or powdered metal centers with continu-
tions. ous or segmental abrasive rims.
Limitation:
Cutting-off wheels are subject to all limitations
of mounting and use listed for Type 1 wheels,
definition 1.4.4, page 17, and section 6,
page 87. In addition, cutting-off wheels are
recommended only for use on specially de-
signed and guarded machines and are subject
to the following maximum thickness and hole
size limitations.
Wheel Diameter Maximum Thickness
1
4" and Smaller / 8"
3
Larger than 4" to 6" / 16 "
1
Larger than 6" to 12" / 4"
3
Larger than 12" to 23" / 8"
1
Larger than 23" to 48" / 2" Illustration 32 – A sample of a wet machine
5
Larger than 48" / 8" used for horizontal cutting-off
Maximum hole size for cutting-off wheels
should not be larger than 1/ 4 wheel diameter.

24
 ANSI B7.1-2000
1.4.19 Mounted wheels E 1.4.19 Mounted wheels
Definition:
Mounted wheels, usually 2" diameter or
smaller, and of various shapes, may be either
organic or inorganic bonded abrasive wheels.
They are secured to plain or threaded man-
drels.
Limitation:
See section 10, page 117, for safe operation
and speeds for mounted wheels.

Illustration 33 – Typical examples of grinding

wheels known as mounted wheels

1.4.20 Threaded hole cup wheels

E 1.4.20 Threaded hole cup wheels
Definition:
Threaded hole cup wheels Types 6 and 11 are
designed for use on vertical, right angle head,
or flexible shaft portable grinders. They have
one central threaded bushing, securely an-
chored in place. They are mounted by being
screwed onto a threaded machine spindle so
that the wheel back seats firmly against an
unrelieved flat back flange.
Limitation:
Threaded hole cup wheel mounting should not
be used with wheels larger than 6" diameter
for portable applications. However, it is recog-
nized that some swing frame applications do Illustration 34 – A cup wheel with a prong
require larger than 6" diameter threaded hole anchor bushing (anchor prong bushing)
cup wheels. Back flanges used in mounting
threaded hole cup wheels shall be flat and
unrelieved.

1.4.21 Tuck pointing wheels

Definition:
Tuck pointing wheels are Type 1 reinforced
organic bonded wheels and have diameter,
thickness and hole size dimensions.
Limitation:
Illustration 35 – A cup wheel
Tuck pointing wheels are subject to the same with a full back bushing
limitations of use and mounting as Type 1
wheels, definition 1.4.4, page 17, and sec-
tion 6, page 87.

25
ANSI B7.1-2000
1.4.22 Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels E 1.4.22 Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels
(terrazzo) (terrazzo)
Definition: Tapered “K” Dimension Tapered “K” Dimension

Some Types 6 and 11 cup wheels used in the

terrazzo trade have tapered K dimensions to
match a special tapered flange furnished by
the machine builder.
Type 6 Wheel (Terrazzo) Type 11 Wheel (Terrazzo)
Limitation:
Illustration 36 – Typical examples of
These wheels shall be mounted only with a modified Types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo)
special tapered flange. showing tapered K dimensions

1.5 Abrasive wheels for use on portable

air grinding machines
Abrasive wheels for use on portable air grind-
ing machines shall conform in type and dimen-
sion to the specifications listed in ANSI B186.1
Safety Code for Portable Air Tools, latest edi-
tion. (For convenience, these wheels are listed
in annex C.)
Exception: It is recognized that wheels other
than those listed exist or may evolve through
technology. Such wheels shall be used only if
either of the following conditions are met:
(1) Where, after consultation and recommen-
dation from the wheel manufacturer and the
grinding machine manufacturer, safety provi-
sions consistent with this standard are made.
(2) Where the grinding machine is designed
and rated for the specific wheel, and proper
safety provisions consistent with this standard
are used.

26
 ANSI B7.1-2000

Explanatory Information
(NOT PART OF ANSI STANDARD)
2 Handling and storage

2.1 Acceptance of shipment

The first inspection shall be made on the
original container. If there is visible evidence
of damage to the container, the shipment
should not be accepted.
2.2 Handling E 2.2 Handling
All abrasive wheels are breakable and there- All abrasive wheels must be handled care-
fore care shall be exercised in handling and fully.
storage to prevent damage. The following
It should be realized that abrasive wheels
rules, which are based on experience, shall
are necessarily manufactured in varying
be observed.
strengths to grind properly.
(a) Handle wheels carefully to prevent drop-
Some abrasive wheels are stronger than oth-
ping or bumping. If a grinding wheel is
ers, but all abrasive wheels can be broken
dropped or suspected of having been
by mishandling.
damaged, it shall not be mounted.
(b) Do not roll wheels (hoop fashion).
(c) Use trucks or other suitable conveyances,
which provide support and protection in
transporting all wheels which cannot be
carried by hand.
(d) Place wheels carefully on a shelf or rack
or in bins, boxes or drawers.
(e) Wheels shipped on pallets may remain
stored on pallets until ready to be
mounted on machines.
2.3 Storage E 2.3 Storage
Suitable racks, bins, drawers or boxes shall Abrasive wheels must be protected while
be provided to store the various types of awaiting use. Wheel storage should be ar-
wheels used. (See figures 1, 2 and 3, pages ranged to allow for removal of wheels with-
28 and 29.) out disturbing or damaging other wheels.
Storage and records should also be set up to
Exception: Pallets should only be stacked in
allow for wheel use on a rotational basis so
accordance with wheel manufacturers’ rec-
that wheels will be in storage a minimum
ommendation.
length of time. This minimizes the possibility
Wheels shall not be stored subject to: of damage from lengthy storage. Such suit-
able storage should be available for partly
(a) Exposure to water or other solvents.
used wheels as well as new wheels.
(b) Any temperature or humidity condition
Blotters supplied loose should be stored flat.
that causes condensation on the wheels.
Copies of all safety folders and notices should
(c) Freezing temperatures.
be prominently displayed in the storage area,
and be made available to the machine op-
erator. (See section 9.1, page 109.)

Note: For inspection procedures prior to mounting, see section 6, page 87.

27
ANSI B7.1-2000
Figure 1 – A well-designed abrasive wheel
storage area used by a large industrial plant
Figure 2 – This drawing illustrates a rack design which
is suitable for handling a wide variety of abrasive wheels
28
Special care should be taken to prevent prob-
lems with wheel support and environmental
conditions for wheels stored in mobile stor-
age areas, such as:
(a) Rescue Squad trucks.
(b) Field contractors.
(c) Barges and boats.
Abrasive wheel storage racks should be de-
signed, constructed and located to fit the
needs of the user. The following factors
should be considered:
Location
All abrasive wheels should be stored in a dry
area in rooms not subject to extreme tem-
perature changes since some bonds may be
affected by excessive humidity, dampness
and extreme temperature differentials. Racks
should be located as near as practical to the
grinding location, but never where there is
danger of damage from passing trucks, crane
handling or excessive vibration.

Figure 3 – The various sizes and shapes of
wheels are located in racks so that they are
easily accessible and protected from damage
ANSI B7.1-2000
Storage methods
The racks, bins or drawers should be con-
structed so that each of the various types of
wheels can be stored in an orderly and safe
manner (see figure 2). Wheel selection
should be possible with a minimum of han-
dling.
The selection of racks, bins, boxes, or draw-
ers for storage depends on the size and type
of wheels. The following suggestions should
be considered.
Thin organic bonded wheels, such as those
used for cutting off, should be laid flat on a
flat surface of steel or similarly rigid material
away from excessive heat, moisture and other
liquids to prevent warpage. Loose blotters
should not be placed between stacked thin
wheels. If thin wheels are supplied with blot-
ters attached, suitable separators should be
used to preserve flatness.
Large diameter wheels (Types 1, 5, 7, 20,
21, 22, 23, 24, 25, and 26) of appreciable
thickness are best supported in racks (see
figure 2). The racks should provide cush-
ioned two-point cradle support to prevent
the wheels from rolling. Partitions are help-
ful in facilitating wheel selection with a mini-
mum of handling.
Flaring cup wheels (Type 11) are best stored
as illustrated in figure 2 to prevent chipping
of edges.
Small wheels (approximately 4 inches or less
in diameter), except flaring cup wheels
(Type 11), are often stored in boxes, bins, or
drawers.
Shelf life
(a) Vitrified bonded grinding wheels
It is generally known in the industry that
under ideal storage conditions, a vitrified
bonded grinding wheel has an almost infinite
shelf life. However, the opportunity for dam-
aging a wheel in storage increases with time
and it is therefore recommended that stock
be rotated to use the oldest wheels first. Any
recommended shelf life provided by an indi-
vidual manufacturer will supersede this rec-
ommendation.
29
ANSI B7.1-2000
(b) Organic bonded grinding wheels
Unlike vitrified bonded grinding wheels, some
organic bonded wheels do have a limited
shelf life. The opportunity for damaging a
wheel in storage increases with time and it is
therefore recommended that stock be ro-
tated to use the oldest wheels first. Refer to
manufacturer for specific recommendations.
Any recommended shelf life provided by an
individual manufacturer will supersede this
recommendation.

30
 ANSI B7.1-2000

Explanatory Information
(NOT PART OF ANSI STANDARD)
3 General machine conditions

3.1 Grinding machine design and mainte-

nance
This standard recognizes that a wide variety
of machines use bonded abrasive wheels. In
this section the term “grinding machine” will
refer to any machine, portable or stationary,
that may use a bonded abrasive wheel.
Where an application requires differentiation
in the standard for a machine type, the dif-
ference will be described.
3.1.1 Supplier's responsibility E 3.1.1 Supplier's responsibility
It shall be the responsibility of the supplier Grinding is a safe operation under normal
(e.g. manufacturer, reconstructor, modifier, conditions. Severe stress can be set up in
installer, integrator) to design, build and la- the wheel if established safe operating prac-
bel grinding machines in accordance with tices are not maintained. Only machines
this and other established standards, to pro- designed in accordance with this and other
vide for the safe use of bonded abrasive established standards, which provide for the
wheels. safe operation at the required grinding speed
and are able to take the pressure and thrust
of the grinding operation, are recommended.
3.1.2 Owner's responsibility E 3.1.2 Owner's responsibility
The user/owner shall use and maintain grind- Proper maintenance of grinding machines is
ing machines in a manner that provides for very important to ensure safe operation.
safe operation in conformance with this stan- Grinding machine maintenance should be
dard. The user/owner shall not convert, performed by qualified personnel only.
change, or otherwise alter the original de-
sign of the machine without the permission
of the machine manufacturer. The user/owner
shall train all personnel in the safe use,
operation and maintenance of the machine
and shall follow the recommendations of the
manufacturer.
3.1.3 Operator's responsibility
Each operator shall be responsible for fol-
lowing the safety and training rules and pro-
cedures established and provided by the
user/owner [employer].
3.2 Safety guards E 3.2 Safety guards
Grinding machines shall be equipped with
Safety guards are used on grinding machines
safety guards in conformance with the re-
to provide protection in case of an acciden-
quirements covered in section 4, page 50.
tal wheel breakage. (See paragraph 4.1,
page 50, for exception.)

31
ANSI B7.1-2000
3.3 Spindle
3.3.1 Diameter of spindle E 3.3.1 Diameter of spindle
The spindle shall be designed and sized to Standard machine design generally conforms
support and drive the wheel under the in- to the minimum spindle diameter require-
tended conditions of use. Table 1, page 34, ment in table 1, page 34. Experience has
shows the minimum diameter of spindles shown that requests for wheels with under-
which should be used for wheels of various size holes often result from the desire to use
sizes. It applies to machines where wheels larger diameter wheels than were originally
are not mounted between bearings. The use intended for the machine.
of heavier spindles than those listed in this
table is often desirable. See section 6,
page 87, for tolerances for arbor holes.
Exception:
On bench grinders with wheels not greater
than 5 inches in diameter operating at pe-
ripheral speeds less than 5,000 SFPM, with
rated outputs not greater than 1 / 10 horse-
power, the spindle diameter may be 3 / 8 " for
wheels no more than 1 / 2 " in thickness.

3.3.2 Tolerance of spindle or mount, up E 3.3.2 Tolerance of spindle or mount

to 3 inches
Abrasive wheels shall fit freely on the spindle,
wheel sleeves, or adaptors, and remain free
fitting under all grinding conditions. To ac-
complish this, the spindle or wheel mount
shall be made to nominal (standard) diam-
eter plus zero, minus 0.002 inches, mea-
sured at 20°C (68°F).
To avoid rupturing pressure in the wheel
hole, the diameter of the spindle or wheel
mount must be as specified so that there is
clearance between the wheel hole and the
spindle or wheel mount under all operating
conditions.
The wheel hole should be made suitably
oversize to assure safety clearance under
the conditions of normal operating heat and
pressure.

3.3.3 Tolerance of spindle or mount,

3 inches and larger
Abrasive wheels shall fit freely on the spindle,
wheel sleeves, or adaptors, and remain free
fitting under all grinding conditions. To ac-
complish this, the spindle or wheel mount
shall be nominal diameter or less while the
wheel shall have a bore greater than nomi-
nal. See paragraph 6.3, page 90 for toler-
ance of holes in wheels.

32
 ANSI B7.1-2000
3.3.4 Length of machine spindle thread E 3.3.4 Length of machine spindle thread
If wheels are mounted by means of a central
spindle nut and flanges, two conditions shall
be maintained (see illustration 37):
1. Spindles shall be of sufficient length to
allow all the threads of the nut to engage the
spindle.
2. The threaded portion shall extend from
the spindle end to inside the outer flange,
but not more than halfway within the arbor
hole of the minimum width wheel for which
the machine is designed.
If threaded hole wheels are of cone or plug Illustration 37 – The spindle is of sufficient
shape with blind holes, the length of the length to accommodate the wheel and flanges
spindle and the depth of the hole shall be
such that the end of the spindle shall not
touch the bottom of the wheel hole (see
illustration 38).

Illustration 38 – Correct and incorrect

mounting of cone wheels with threaded holes

3.4 Direction of machine spindle rotation E 3.4 Direction of machine spindle thread
3.4.1 Direction of machine spindle thread When reassembling double ended machines
which have a right hand thread on one end
If wheels or flanges are secured by means of
and a left hand thread on the other, care
a central spindle nut, the direction of the
must be used to replace the spindle properly
thread shall be in such relation to the direc-
with respect to the direction of the threads.
tion of rotation that the nut will tend to tighten
as the spindle revolves. On machines with
spindle reversal capability, and machines
where flanges are interchanged from one
end of the spindle to the other, means shall
be provided to prevent the wheel and flanges
from loosening as the spindle revolves.
3.4.2 Direction arrows
An arrow, visible to the operator, shall be
displayed indicating the intended direction
of grinding wheel spindle rotation. An arrow
shall also be used to indicate the intended
direction of rotation of any other rotating Illustration 39
device where a hazard may be created by The direction of rotation of the cutting-off wheel
improper direction or rotation. (See illustra- is indicated by the arrow on the guard. This is
tion 39.) also the direction the nut must be turned for
removal.

33
 Table 1 – Recommended minimum diameters of machine spindles at point of mounting for wheels

34
of various diameters and thicknesses operating at standard speeds as listed in table 23 (1
Diameter Thickness of Wheel, Inches
of Wheel < 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-3/4 3 3-1/4 3-1/2 4 5 6
ANSI B7.1-2000

3/8 3/32 3/32 3/32 3/32 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 — — — — — — — — — — —

1/2 3/32 3/32 3/32 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 3/16 — — — — — — — — —
5/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 3/16 — — — — — — — — —
3/4 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 3/8 — 3/8 — — — — —
7/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 3/8 — 3/8 — 3/8 — — —
1 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 — 3/8 — 3/8 — — —
1-1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 — 3/8 — 3/8 — — —
1-1/4 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 — 3/8 — 3/8 — — —
1-3/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 — 3/8 — 3/8 — — —
1-1/2 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 — 3/8 — 3/8 1/2 1/2 —
1-5/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 — 3/8 — 3/8 1/2 1/2 —
1-3/4 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 — 1/2 — 1/2 1/2 1/2 —
1-7/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 3/8 1/2 — 1/2 — 1/2 1/2 1/2 —
2 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8
3 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8
4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4
5 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
6 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1
7 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1
8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4
10 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4
12 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2
14 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
16 7/8 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4
18 7/8 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4
20 1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2
24 1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2 2 2
26 1 1 1 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2 2 2 2 2
30 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2 2 2 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4
36 1-1/2 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-3/4 2-3/4
40 1-3/4 2 2 2 2 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4
44 2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 3 3 3 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2
48 2-1/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 3 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 4
53 2-1/2 3 3 3 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4 4 4 4-1/2
60 2-3/4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4-1/2 4-1/2 5 5
72 3 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 4 4 4 4-1/2 4-1/2 4-1/2 4-1/2 4-1/2 5 5 6 6
NOTE: For speeds exceeding those listed in table 23, page 99, for usually severe operations and for wheels with heavy mountings (such as bolted-on-abrasive discs), the spindle sizes
shown in the above table may not be adequate. Inasmuch as the proper spindle size is dependent upon many factors, such as general design of the machine, type of bearings,
quality of materials, workmanship and application of wheel, a simple table is not practicable. Wheels larger than specified by the machine manufacturers shall not be used.
(1)
This table is not intended for use with steel-centered diamond cutting-off wheels used for concrete or wall sawing.
 ANSI B7.1-2000
3.4.3 Machines using threaded hole
wheels
The direction of the thread shall be such that
to remove the wheel, the wheel must be
turned in the same direction it rotates when
in use.
3.5 Flanges E 3.5 Flanges
All machines which mount grinding wheels Proper selection, use, and maintenance of
or cutting-off wheels shall be equipped with flanges are all essential factors in the safe
flanges in accordance with the requirements use of abrasive wheels. See section 5,
listed in section 5, page 72. page 72.
Flange design must be such that flange dis-
tortion will not occur under all operating con-
ditions. If distortion occurs, flat flange bear-
ing surfaces must be maintained — a failure
to maintain flat flange bearing surfaces will
result in a dangerous operating condition.
3.6 Diameter and speed control for grind- E 3.6 Diameter and speed control for
ing machines grinding machines
Abrasive wheel grinding machines shall be Mounting and running a wheel larger than
provided with a means of limiting the diam- the machine was designed to operate with is
eter of the wheel that can be mounted, or an unsafe practice and can result in wheel
shall display instruction and warning plates breakage.
which clearly state the maximum wheel di-
ameter which shall be permitted to be used.
3.6.1 A grinding machine shall not be oper-
ated at a speed exceeding its rated speed.
3.6.2 No grinding wheels shall be mounted
which have a greater diameter than the ma-
chine is designed for and/or the maximum
size displayed on the nameplate.
3.6.3 Grinding machines using a single
wheel spindle speed
The safety guard is satisfactory as a device
for limiting the wheel diameter, and hence
surface feet per minute (measured in SFPM
or m/sec) of the abrasive wheel on single
speed machines.
3.6.4 Stationary grinding machines using E 3.6.4 Stationary grinding machines us-
variable wheel spindle speed controls ing variable wheel spindle speed controls
Variable speed machines shall have addi- On variable speed machines, the speed con-
tional means to prevent the wheel from oper- trol device must be maintained in proper
ating above the maximum rated wheel speed. working condition. Overriding these controls
On variable speed machines where the speed is dangerous and could result in a severe
is controlled by a direct mechanical link, overspeed condition which, in turn, could
such as floor stand type machines, the speed cause a wheel to break.

35
ANSI B7.1-2000
adjusting device shall be connected to an In the case of floor stand type machines, if
adjustable guard or another diameter limit- the speed control device is inadvertently
ing device to prevent the mounting of a larger ground while adjusting the wheel speed, care
diameter wheel on the machine when it is set should be exercised and the machine re-
to operate at higher speeds for smaller di- paired so it performs as originally designed
ameter wheels. This direct size relationship and provided by the manufacturer.
will prevent the wheel from being operated
at higher than the intended Surface Feet Per
Minute (SFPM). On other machines, which
use electronic or other wheel speed control
devices, a means and procedure shall be
provided to ensure that the maximum SFPM
established by the manufacturer is not ex-
ceeded. All such limiting devices, should
they fail, shall not cause the wheel to
overspeed.
3.6.5 Permanent speed marking for single
speed machines
The spindle RPM of single speed grinders
shall be permanently marked on the ma-
chines and shall be readily visible to the
operator(s).
3.6.6 Permanent speed marking for vari-
able speed grinders
The governing factor on variable speed ma-
chines is the peripheral speed which is nor-
mally rated in surface feet per minute (SFPM)
or meters per second (m/sec). The range of
the spindle RPMs and the relative wheel
sizes shall be permanently marked on the
machine and shall be readily visible to the
operator(s).
3.7 Work support on stationary and bench E 3.7 Work support on stationary and
grinders bench grinders
A grinding machine shall be designed so that
work support mechanisms can be used and
adjusted to support the workpiece without
compromising the safety of the operator of
the machine for its intended purpose (see
illustration 40).

Illustration 40 – Floor stand grinder

with a properly adjusted work rest

36
 ANSI B7.1-2000
3.7.1 Work support for off-hand grinding E 3.7.1 Work support for off-hand grinding
The work support for off-hand grinding, typi- Care should be exercised with variable speed
cally referred to as a work rest, shall be grinders, where the work rest is part of the
provided to support the workpiece. These variable speed control linkage, that a “U” is
work rests shall be of rigid construction and not ground in the work rest, creating the
adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. possibility that the recommended maximum
operating speed of the abrasive wheel is
Exception: Swing Frame Machines
exceeded.
3.7.2 Work support for cylindrical grind-
ing machines
Work support for cylindrical grinding ma-
chines, made up of a variety of devices that
hold and drive (turn) the workpiece, shall be
provided to support the workpiece. Devices
that drive the workpiece, including head-
stocks and workheads, shall be designed
with controls compatible with the machine
application. Devices that hold the workpiece,
including work centers, chucking mecha-
nisms, and spindle noses, shall be designed
to properly hold the workpiece during grind-
ing operations. Other support devices, in-
cluding steady rests and center rests, shall
be designed to properly support the
workpiece during the grinding operation.
3.7.3 Auxiliary work support for cylindri-
cal grinding machines
Cylindrical grinding machines may require
auxiliary support devices to support the
workpiece when it is being loaded or un-
loaded. Such devices are commonly called
work cradles.
When the workpiece weight, configuration,
or other characteristic requires auxiliary sup-
port, the grinding machine manufacturer shall
provide cradles specifically designed to fa-
cilitate handling of the workpiece when it is
loaded or unloaded.
When auxiliary work support devices must
be used on the grinding machine, the user
shall establish procedures to ensure that the
workpiece is supported properly before the
work support mechanisms engage in the
workpiece.
3.8 Portable grinding machines— Spindle
and flange design for threaded hole
wheels
Portable air grinders shall be manufactured
and operated in accordance with ANSI
B186.1 (see paragraph 1.5, page 26).

37
ANSI B7.1-2000
3.8.1 Spindles
3.8.1.1 A grinder shall be equipped with a
spindle which will properly accept the type
and size of grinding wheel for which it is
intended and rated.
3.8.1.2 Design consideration for spindle
thread directions are defined in section 3.4,
page 33.
3.8.1.3 Spindles of grinders for mounted
wheels shall be equipped with collets. The
collet shall have precision such that the
runout on a test pin mounted in the collet
shall not exceed the following total indicator
reading when measured at a distance of one
inch (twenty-five mm) from the front end of
the collet, or at a distance equal to the depth
of the collet, whichever is shorter.
.007"
Grinders below 25,000 RPM
(.178 mm)
.005"
Grinders 25,000 to 40,000 RPM
(.125 mm)
.003"
Grinders over 40,000 RPM
(.076 mm)

3.8.2 Flange design E 3.8.2 Flange design

The back flange shall be flat, unrelieved,
securely fastened and square to the spindle
axis. The back flange shall be of sufficient
diameter to ensure proper support of the
wheel. (See table 17, page 83).
A relieved back flange shall not be used.
If a relieved back flange is used, it will cause
the bushing to be pulled out of the wheel, as
shown in illustration 41.
The back flange should be flat and heavy
enough to prevent distortion.
Flat Flange — No relief Relieved Flange
Provides proper support for Does not provide
steel bushing and wheel proper support

CORRECT INCORRECT

Illustration 41 – Unrelieved and relieved

flange

38
 ANSI B7.1-2000
3.8.3 Side handles E 3.8.3 Side handles
Portable vertical and angle grinders 4" and The side handle is normally placed at 90
larger shall be equipped with a side handle degrees to the switch handle and provides
for operator control and safety. The operator the operator with a means of maintaining
shall not remove the side handle from the secure control of the tool at all times. Opera-
tool. tion of the tool without the side handle can
result in loss of control and is hazardous.
Most side handles must be assembled to the
tool when it is received, because installing
the handle greatly increases the size of the
shipping container and handles can be bro-
ken off during shipment.
3.9 Mount design for abrasive discs (in- E 3.9 Mount design for abrasive discs
serted nut, inserted washer and project- (inserted nut, inserted washer and pro-
ing stud type) jecting stud type)
Machines on which abrasive discs are Illustrations 42 and 43 and figure 5 will serve
mounted shall be provided with a disc mount- to clarify the difference which exists between
ing plate equal to or larger than the nominal the three types of mountings for abrasive
abrasive disc diameter and of sufficient thick- discs; the inserted nut type, the inserted
ness to provide necessary support. Minimum washer type and the projecting stud type.
disc mounting plate thickness for disc grind- (See ANSI Standard, Machine and Plate
ers are given in table 2 below. Mounted Discs, ANSI B5.35.)
Table 2 – Minimum thickness of machine The machine face plate (steel disc wheel)
face plates (steel disc wheels) for must be maintained true, flat, and clean.
mounting abrasive discs When regrinding the face plate, caution
should be taken to ensure that the X dimen-
Minimum sion (figure 4) is not ground so small that,
Diameter Thickness when mounting, the screws could touch the
(Inches) (Inches) bottom of the hole. If this condition occurs,
14 & Smaller 1/2 the wheel may be damaged.
Over 14 to 18 5/8
Over 18 to 26 3/4
Over 26 to 36 7/8
Over 36 to 40 1
Over 40 to 72 1 1/8

Based on material of minimum 60,000 psi

tensile strength steel, other material or de-
sign may be used that will provide equiva-
lent or greater strength and stiffness.
Screw holes in the machine face plate shall
be accurately located to match the threaded
holes in the inserted nuts in the abrasive
disc and shall be large enough such that the
screws will not bind.
Dimension X (figure 4) shall be uniform for
all mounting screws so that the screws can
be interchangeable.

39
ANSI B7.1-2000

Figure 4

Screws shall be of sufficient length to prop-

erly engage the threads in the inserted nuts,
yet not so long that there will be any possi-
bility of the ends touching bottom.
The disc mounting surface of the machine
face plate (steel wheel) shall be flat and
perpendicular to the axis of the spindle rota-
tion and support the disc concentrically when Illustration 42 – Inserted nut type abrasive disc
mounted.

Illustration 43 – Inserted washer type

abrasive disc
Figure 5 – Various methods of mounting
projecting stud or stud mounted
type abrasive discs

40

3.10 Mount design for plate mounted type
discs
Screw holes in the plate mounted disc mount-
ing plate shall be accurately located to match
the threaded holes in the mounting plate and
shall be large enough so that the screws will
not bind.
If the mounting plate attached to the disc is
as thick or thicker than shown in table 2,
page 39, there are no special requirements
regarding the diameter and thickness of the
machine face plate (steel disc wheel).
If the mounting plate attached to the disc is
thinner than shown in table 2, page 39, the
machine shall be equipped with a machine
face plate (steel disc wheel) of sufficient
diameter and thickness to provide adequate
additional support. Minimum specifications
are given in table 3 for disc grinders.
ANSI B7.1-2000
E 3.10 Mount design for plate mounted
type discs
A typical method of mounting plate mounted
type discs is shown in illustration 44. Note
the additional reinforcement to the abrasive
disc and the mounting plate by the machine
face plate (steel disc wheel).
Even when plate mounted discs are used,
the machine face plate (steel disc wheel)
should be the full diameter of the disc where
possible. The original thickness of the ma-
chine face plate should be thicker than the
minimum in table 3 to allow re-machining to
correct for wear.

Table 3 – Minimum thickness and diameter

of machine face plate (steel disc wheel)
for machines using plate mounted discs
having thin mounting plates
Minimum
Abrasive Disc Diameter
Thickness
D (Inches) P t (Inches)
3
12 and Smaller /8
1
14 to 16 (over 12 to, and including, 16) /2
5
17 to 18 (over 16 to, and including, 18) /8
3
19 to 26 (over 18 to, and including, 26) /4
7
27 to 36 (over 26 to, and including, 36) /8

D
Illustration 44 – Plate mounted type discs
H

Pt

Pd
Mounting Plate Machine Face Plate
(Steel Disc Plate)

D+H
P d shall never be less than nor shall the
2
difference between D and P d exceed 2 inches. It
is recommended that P d equal D wherever practi-
cal.

41
ANSI B7.1-2000
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS APPLY TO
STATIONARY MACHINES
3.11 Stationary machines, excluding
bench and pedestal grinders, using wheels
smaller than 10" in diameter
3.11.1 Power
Grinding machines shall be provided with
sufficient power to maintain the rated wheel
spindle speed under conditions of operation
for which the machine is designed.
3.11.2 Exhaust provision
Where the level of airborne fumes or particu-
lates can create a hazard, grinding machines
shall have a provision for, or connection to,
an exhaust system unless a zone exhaust
system is used.
3.11.3 Moving parts
Hazards to personnel associated with mov-
ing parts shall be safeguarded.
3.11.3.1 Machine components, fixtures, and
workpieces shall not constitute a hazard to
the operator or other personnel, provided
other safety procedures are followed.
3.11.3.2 No protective device shall of itself
create a hazard to the operator or other
personnel nor shall it restrict his ability to
observe and control the machine cycle.
3.11.3.3 Power transmission
All mechanical power transmission compo-
nents shall be enclosed so that access to
any moving parts can be gained only by the
opening or removal of a guard, door or cover.
3.11.3.3.1 When guards, doors and covers E 3.11.3.3.1 A warning is required since
enclosing power transmission components non-interlocked guards, doors or covers could
are not interlocked with mechanical or elec- be removed without stopping the machine,
trical devices, a warning legend shall be leaving dangerous moving parts exposed.
displayed that states: “DO NOT OPERATE The warning legend should be attached at
MACHINE WITHOUT ALL GUARDS IN the exposed danger zone and not on any
PLACE AND SECURED.” guard, door or cover that can be removed.
3.11.3.3.2 When guards, doors and covers E 3.11.3.3.2 Guards, doors and covers en-
enclosing power transmission components closing power transmission components
are not interlocked with mechanical or elec- should only be opened by qualified mainte-
trical devices, they shall be fastened with a nance or supervisory personnel. The require-
device that requires a tool to open the enclo- ment of a tool is to keep operators and
sure. others out of these enclosures.

42
 ANSI B7.1-2000
3.11.3.3.3 No protective device enclosing
the power transmission components shall of
itself create a hazard to the operator or
other personnel nor shall it restrict his ability
to control the machine cycle.
3.11.4 Grinding tools
Personnel associated with grinding tools shall
be safeguarded against hazards. Abrasive
wheels shall be used only on machines con-
structed in accordance with section 3,
page 31.
3.11.4.1 Honing tools
3.11.4.1.1 Honing tools shall be operated
within the tool manufacturer's specifications
for speed and direction.
3.11.4.1.2 Honing tools connected to drive E 3.11.4.1.2 In the event that stones or
shafts having universal joints, or honing tools guides, or both, are not securely retained in
containing abrasive tools or guides, or both, the honing tool, the tool should be located
not rigidly attached to the tool shall not be inside the workpiece before the tool is ro-
allowed to rotate under power outside the tated at honing speeds. This will, in effect,
workpiece or a guard. allow the workpiece to then be utilized as a
guard.
3.11.4.1.3 Means shall be provided to ab- E 3.11.4.1.3 A gripping fixture, or radial
sorb rotary forces on the workpiece resulting extension of the workpiece, should be sup-
from the honing operations. ported by the machine so that the operator is
not required to manually resist the rotational
3.11.5 Sharp corners and edges
forces. Hone truing devices are not consid-
Machine components, assemblies and guards ered workpieces.
shall be designed to minimize or eliminate
all sharp corners, and edges that may con-
stitute a hazard to the operator or mainte-
nance personnel.
3.11.6 Direction of controls
Whenever grinding machine component
movement can be controlled in one or an-
other of two opposing directions, the design
of the controls shall attempt to follow the
conventions in this section.
Exception:
It may be that in certain cases these conven-
tions should not be applied. A departure
from these conventions should then be made
clear by showing on the machine the direc-
tions of operation of the control and the
corresponding directions of movement of the
controlled component.

43
ANSI B7.1-2000
3.11.6.1 Lever controls
(a) For control of linear movement, the move-
ment of the lever in either direction from the
neutral or center position shall result in a
machine motion in the same direction (see
figure 6).

Figure 6 – Control of linear movements

(b) For control of circular movement, it is

recommended that the plane of rotation of
the control lever be parallel to the plane of
rotation of the component, and that the move-
ment of the lever shall produce a movement
of the controlled component in the same
direction (see figure 7).

Figure 7 – Control of circular movement

3.11.6.2 Push button controls

Placement of push button controls shall be
configured so that the operation of the right-
hand button, the top button, or the button
furthest away from the operator is to pro-
duce a movement to the right, upward or
away from the operator when the operator is
standing in the normal operating position.
This recommendation is applicable for the
control of both linear and circular move-
ments (see figure 8).

Figure 8 – Relationship of rectilinear

and circular movements and
location of push buttons

44
 ANSI B7.1-2000
3.11.6.3 Hand wheel controls
The clockwise rotation of the hand wheel
(the operator facing the shaft end on which
the hand wheel is mounted) shall produce
motion so that:
(a) The linear movement of the component
is to the right, away from the operator, or
upwards when the operator is standing in the
normal operating position (see figure 9).

Figure 9 – Handwheel control resulting in

rectilinear movements

(b) For a rotational movement, the compo-

nent being turned moves in a clockwise di-
rection (as viewed by the operator when
facing the end of the spindle or shaft on
which the controlled component is mounted)
(see figure 10).

Figure 10 – Handwheel control resulting in

rotational movements

(c) A movement toward the center of the

component (clamping a chuck).
3.11.6.4 Special cases
If the direction of the movement of the con-
trolled component can be varied by a
preselector device, the conventions given in
3.11.6.1 through 3.11.6.3 apply to the direc-
tion which is most frequently used. If the
same control is used for starting both cutting
and the feed movement, the recommenda-
tions in 3.11.6 apply to the feed movement.
3.11.7 Tripdogs/foot controls
Tripdogs and foot controls shall be designed
and mounted in such a manner that they

45
ANSI B7.1-2000
cannot be accidentally tripped, causing the
machine to cycle or move unexpectedly.
3.11.8 Work holding and driving (loading)
Work holding and driving devices shall be
designed to hold the part securely and not
allow it to become loose or be ejected from
the machine during the grinding cycle.
3.11.8.1 Loading of parts into the ma-
chine
Loading of parts into the machine can be
accomplished either manually or automati-
cally as follows:
(a) Manual loading shall be accomplished
without placing the operator in a hazardous
position. Initiation of the machine cycle after
manual loading shall require a deliberate
action by the operator such as activating the
cycle start device.
(b) Automatic part loading mechanisms may
require guarding if they create potential dan-
ger zones. This may be accomplished by
fixed or removable guards requiring tools for
their removal, or by electrically and/or me-
chanically interlocked guards which can be
removed without the use of any tools. In the
case of interlocked guards it shall be insured
that the potential danger has been elimi-
nated before the interlock is opened and the
guards are removed. Restarting of the auto-
matic operation shall require the initiation of
the normal machine cycle start control. In no
case shall the closure or the replacement of
the guard cause the start of any machine or
loader motion.
3.11.9 Fire prevention and protection
When magnesium, aluminum, or similar py-
rophoric or explosive particles are gener-
ated during grinding, or where ignitable fumes
are generated from the grinding fluids, mea-
sures shall be taken such as explosion re-
lief, automatic fire extinguishing and manual
wetting to minimize the risk.
3.11.10 Hydraulic and pneumatic pres-
sure protection
Protection for the operator or maintenance
personnel shall be provided where exces-
sive pressure, inadequate pressure, or loss
of pressure would create a hazard. This would

46
 ANSI B7.1-2000
also include circuits that contain trapped
pressures after power is turned off.
3.11.11 Lighting
Adequate lighting shall be supplied by the
employer as required for the safe operation
of the machine. Where machine structures
or guarding obstructs the normal shop illumi-
nation, additional machine mounted lighting,
supplied by the manufacturer, may be re-
quired.
3.12 Control systems
3.12.1 Electrical
All new and rebuilt grinding machines as
defined in section 1.2.30, page 3, shall be in
accordance with the latest revision of
NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial
Machinery.
3.12.1.1 General construction
Operator controls, control enclosures, wire-
ways and disconnects shall be located or
protected to prevent electrical hazards.
3.12.1.2 Disconnect
A main power disconnect switch, when sup-
plied, shall be capable of being locked only
in the "off" position.
3.12.1.3 Operating control
Any operating control (button or lever) that
could initiate a hazardous motion shall be
protected against unintended operation.
3.12.1.4 Low-voltage protection
All grinding machines shall incorporate a
means of disconnecting the power source
from all motors in the event of a control-
voltage or power source failure. Restart of
the machine shall require deliberate action
that shall not in itself create a hazard.
3.12.1.5 Voltage
All AC control circuits and solenoid-valve
coils shall be powered by not more than a
nominal 120-volt AC supply obtained from a
transformer with an isolated secondary.
Higher voltages that may be necessary for
operation of machine or control mechanisms
shall be isolated from any control mecha-
nisms handled by the operator, but motor

47
ANSI B7.1-2000
starters with integral start-stop buttons may
utilize line-voltage control. All DC control
circuits shall be powered by not more than a
nominal 24-volt DC supply isolated from any
higher voltage.
3.12.1.6 Grounds
All grinding machines shall be protected
against the possibility of an accidental ground
in the control circuit causing false operation
when such operation would create a hazard.
3.12.1.7 Component failure
Circuits shall be so designed that hazards
will be minimized in the event of overload,
component failure, or improperly sequenced
operations.
3.12.1.8 Emergency stop
A control shall be provided at each normal
work station that will stop machine motions
without creating a hazard.
3.12.1.9 Identification
All operator selector switches and push but-
tons shall have their functions clearly identi-
fied.
3.12.1.10 Control component location
The location of the operator control compo-
nents shall not create a hazard to the opera-
tor.
3.12.2 Unintended operation
3.12.2.1 Machine controls shall be located,
designed, interlocked or guarded to inhibit
unintended operation that would create a
hazard.
3.12.2.2 Foot-operated tripping controls shall
be protected so as to prevent accidental
actuation.
3.12.2.3 A machine or machine cycle that
has been stopped or interrupted shall re-
quire deliberate action by the operator to
restart the machine.
3.12.2.4 Guards that are interlocked with
the machine cycle, when opened, shall stop
the related components, interrupt the ma-
chine cycle, or shut down the machine with-
out creating a hazard. Closing the guard
shall not be an acceptable method of restart-
ing the machine cycle.

48
 ANSI B7.1-2000
3.13 Airborne contaminants, flying par-
ticles and sparks
3.13.1 Particles and sparks shall not present
a hazard to the operator or other personnel.
The employer shall install and operate grind-
ing machines so that the airborne contami-
nants caused by the grinding operation shall
not exceed the permissible limit established
by the authority having jurisdiction.
3.13.2 Flow slopes and discharge port open-
ings, including exhaust outlets for dry grind-
ing, shall be designed to provide for the
movement of particles to the designated point
of removal or exit.
3.13.3 Spark hazard prevention
The spark shower should be directed down-
ward and away from the face and body of the
operator. Prior to grinding sparking materi-
als, care shall be taken to shield any nearby
flammable materials to prevent ignition from
the spark shower or from latent sparks.
3.14 Coolant, lubrication, hydraulic fluid,
compressed gas
3.14.1 Loss of coolant and lubricants from
the machine shall be minimized by system
design or installation of suitable shields or
enclosures.
3.14.2 Each flexible pressurized line shall
be suitable for the conditions under which it
is used and restrained or confined if its fail-
ure would constitute a hazard.
3.15 Noise level
The noise level of grinding machines shall
not exceed the limits stated by the appli-
cable regulatory agency. The noise level of
the grinding machine shall be measured with
the machine operating without a workpiece
at those normal speeds and cycles that would
be expected to produce the highest noise
levels.

49
ANSI B7.1-2000

Explanatory Information
(NOT PART OF ANSI STANDARD)
4 Safety guards

4.1 General requirements E 4.1 General requirements

All abrasive wheels shall be used only on Exceptions: (1 through 7)
machines provided with Safety Guards.
On difficult to guard applications, the excep-
Exceptions: This requirement shall not apply tions to the use of safety guards are based
to the following classes of wheels and condi- on the fact that the operator can be pro-
tions. tected by personal safety equipment since
these classes of wheels have low mass.
(1) Wheels used for internal grinding while
Also, in many instances the work acts as a
advancing, retracting or within the work
guard. Adequate face protection is particu-
(see illustration 45).
larly important when using this class of
(2) Mounted wheels, 2" and smaller in diam- wheel.
eter used in portable operations (see
definition, section 1.4.19, page 25).
(3) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R and 19 cones and
plugs and threaded hole pot balls where
the work offers protection or where the
size does not exceed 3" in diameter by
5" long.
(4) Metal centered diamond lapidary wheels
(see section 1.3.11, page 13) either
notched, segmented or continuous rim
used with a coolant deflector, when op-
erated at speeds up to 3,500 SFPM.
(5) Type 1 wheels not larger than 2" in diam-
eter and not more than 1 / 2 " thick, operat-
ing at peripheral speeds less than 1,800
SFPM when mounted on mandrels driven
by portable drills.
(6) Type 1 reinforced wheels not more than
3" in diameter and 1 / 4 " in thickness, oper-
ating at peripheral speeds not exceeding Illustration 45 – An example of an internal
9,500 SFPM, provided that safety glasses grinding operation where the piece being
and face shield protection are worn. ground serves as the wheel guard
(7) Valve seat grinding wheels.
(8) Machines that are remotely operated, and
with an enclosure sufficient to retain the
pieces of a wheel should there be a
breakage, shall not require a safety guard
at the wheel.
Lock-outs and administrative procedures
shall be used to assure that no person-
nel are in the enclosure while the ma-
chine is in operation.
NOTE: For additional forms of operator pro-
tection, see annex A.

50

4.2 Portable grinding
4.2.1 Design of safety guards
The wheel guard shall be mounted so as to
maintain alignment with the wheel. The guard
shall be positioned so that pieces of an
accidentally broken wheel shall be deflected
away from the operator. The combined
strength of the fasteners shall maintain the
guard in a safe position in the event of wheel
breakage.
Wheel guards shall be designed so that if
they become damaged or distorted in the
event of wheel breakage, they will not be-
come a hazard.
4.2.2 Safety guards for specific wheel
types
Safety guards for specific wheel types shall
meet the following specifications.
4.2.2.1 Type 1 grinding wheels, cutting-
off wheels, and tuck pointing wheels
A safety guard for Type 1 wheels shall en-
close the top and both sides of the grinding
wheel through at least 180° of the wheel.
Enclosure of the spindle end, nut and the
outer flange is not required. (See figure 11.)
Figure 11 – Typical drawn steel guard
for straight wheels — Type1
ANSI B7.1-2000
E 4.2.1 Design of safety guards
The safety guard should allow the wheel to
be used in the manner for which it was
designed so as not to discourage use of a
guard.
E 4.2.2 Safety guards for specific wheel
types
The safety guard should be designed so that
the wheel can be removed and mounted
without removing the guard from the grinder.
It is permissible to remove a guard member
to change wheels. Care must be taken to
insure that the removable section of the
guard can be easily replaced and will ensure
the original safety of the guard after the
removable section has been replaced.
E 4.2.2.1 Type 1 grinding wheels, cutting-
off wheels, and tuck pointing wheels
An essential safety feature of a guard for a
Type 1 wheel is that it encloses the upper
half of the wheel. In case of accidental break-
age of the wheel, the guard will deflect the
pieces away from the operator (see illustra-
tion 46).
Illustration 46 – Examples of typical guarding
of Type 1 wheel operations
51
ANSI B7.1-2000
4.2.2.2 Vertical and angle grinders, Types
6 and 11 cup wheels
A safety guard for vertical or angle grinders
using Type 6 or Type 11 cup wheels shall
cover the wheel’s plane of rotation toward
the operator for at least 180°; shall cover the
side of the wheel toward the driving flange
for at least 180°; and shall have a skirt
which is adjustable to within 1 / 8 " of the plane
of the surface of the wheel. (See figure 12.)
NOTE:
a. “Cup Back Bushings” under no circum-
stances shall be considered a substitute for a
guard, and wheels so manufactured shall not
be used without a guard.
b. So-Called “Revolving Cup Guards” shall
not be used, and under no circumstances shall
be considered a substitute for a guard.
Figure 12 – Typical drawn steel guard
for cup wheels — Types 6 and 11
52
E 4.2.2.2 Vertical and angle grinders,
Types 6 and 11 cup wheels
Cup Wheels are available with either a
threaded or unthreaded hole. Guards are
available for each of these types. The fol-
lowing illustrations, 47 and 48, show the
typical types. Each is shown mounted in
conjunction with a guard.
NOTE:
a. Some Type 11 cup wheels and Type 6 cup
wheels are manufactured with a steel bushing
that covers the complete back of the wheel
and comes up the side of the wheel about 1 / 2 ".
These are commonly called “Cup Back Bush-
ings.”
b. A “Revolving Cup Guard” is a formed steel
cup which covers the full back of the wheel
and comes a short distance down the side of
the wheel (approx. 9 / 16 "). The cup has a small
clearance between the side of the cup and the
wheel (approx. 1 / 16 "). It is sandwiched between
the wheel and the grinder and rotates with the
wheel. This design is not acceptable and shall
not be used as a substitute for a guard.
Illustration 47 – Type 6 cup wheel showing
band type guard
Illustration 48 – A band-type guard used with
Type 11 cup wheel
 ANSI B7.1-2000
4.2.2.3 Vertical and angle grinders, Types E 4.2.2.3 Vertical and angle grinders,
27, 28 and 29 depressed center wheels Types 27, 28 and 29 depressed center
wheels
A safety guard for vertical or angle grinders
using Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels shall
cover the wheel’s plane of rotation toward
the operator for at least 180°; shall cover the
side of the wheel toward the driving flange
for at least 180°; and shall have a lip on the
outer edge which curls inward to deflect
wheel fragments and to provide necessary
strength. The lip shall extend beyond the
surface of the wheel throughout the 180°
coverage (see figure 13 and illustration 49).

Illustration 49 – An angle grinder equipped

with a Type 27 wheel and guard

Figure 13 – Typical drawn steel guard for

depressed center wheels — Types 27, 28 and 29

4.2.3 Maintenance of safety guards for

portable machines
Safety guards shall be inspected periodi-
cally. Safety guards shall be in good func-
tional condition.
Damaged, bent and severely worn guards
shall be replaced. A guard which has been
subject to a wheel breakage is likely to be
weakened internally and shall not be re-
used.
4.2.4 Strength of safety guards
4.2.4.1 Portable electric grinders
Safety guards shall conform to the materials
and dimensions of tables 4, 5, 6 or 7 as
applicable, or satisfactorily meet the perfor-
mance criteria prescribed in sec-
tion 4.2.4.1.1.

53
ANSI B7.1-2000
An electric grinding machine shall be marked
with the maximum unloaded speed in RPM.

Figure 14 – Typical drawn steel guard for

Type 1 and cutting-off wheels

Table 4 (see figure 14) – Materials and minimum thickness of drawn steel guards
for Type 1 wheels used on portable electric grinders

Material Used in Construction of Guard Wheel Diameter — inches

Maximum Thickness
Sheet Steel 2 through 5 Over 5 through 8
of Wheel
Min. Tensile Strength 60,000 psi Minimum Thickness Minimum Thickness
For Speeds Up Through (SFPM) inches A B A B
9,500 1 1/16 1/16 3/32 1/16
12,500 1 3/32 1/16 3/32 3/32
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions
affording equal or superior protection are also acceptable.

Table 5 (see figure 14) – Minimum basic thicknesses for peripheral and side members for safety
guards for use with cutting-off wheels on portable electric grinders

Cutting-off wheel diameters — inches

Material Used in Maximum Thickness of Speed not to Over 11 through
6 through 11 inches
Construction of Guard Cutting-Off Wheel Exceed 20 inches

A B A B
Structural Steel 1/4 inch or less 14,200 SFPM 1/16 1/16 3/32 3/32
(minimum tensile
strength 60,000 psi) 1/4 inch or less 16,000 SFPM 3/32 1/8 1/8 1/8
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions
affording equal or superior protection are also acceptable.

54
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 6 (see figure 12) – Material thickness guide for construction of drawn steel guards used on portable
electric grinders with cup wheels, Types 6 and 11. Operating speed not to exceed 9,500 SFPM.

B C D
Wheel Diameter Washer Back Plate Thickness Hood Skirt
inches inches inches inches
4 3/32 1/16 1/8
5 3/32 3/32 1/8
6 3/32 3/32 1/8
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions
stated and are based on 50,000 psi minimum tensile strength. Other material,
designs or dimensions affording equal or superior protection are also acceptable.

Table 7 (see figure 13) – Guide for construction of drawn steel guard used
on portable electric grinders with Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels.

Material Used in Construction of Guard

Sheet Steel Wheel Diameter A B
Min. Tensile Strength 60,000 psi Thickness of Wheel
For Speeds Up Through (SFPM) inches inches inches
14200 3/8 inches or less 3 through 9 0.0625 0.5

The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs
or dimensions affording equal or superior protection are also acceptable.

4.2.4.1.1 Performance criteria for guard E 4.2.4.1.1 Performance criteria for guard
design for portable electric grinders design for portable electric grinders
Procedure: With the advent of ever changing technology
and improved materials, it becomes impera-
1. Guard shall be mounted on a firm struc-
tive that there be some performance criteria
ture, using the part of the housing which
for the design of machine elements.
is normally used to mount the guard to
the grinder. By designating the important parameters it
allows the designer freedom to use his inge-
2. Test speed shall be at least 110% of the
nuity to design a better product to do the
marked no-load speed of the grinder.
job.
3. Grinding wheel shall be the maximum
The design criteria in 4.2.4.1.1 is designed
diameter and thickness recommended by
to provide reasonable protection to the op-
the manufacturer for use on the grinder.
erator and still allow him to grind efficiently.
The grinding wheel is to be broken by a
sharp impact, notching, or other suitable
means and broken into major pieces while
running at the test speed. Major pieces
being defined as two (2) or more pieces,
each being at least 25% of the wheel
mass.
Acceptance Criteria:
1. All fragments shall be contained or de-
flected through an arc of 180° in the
plane or planes of wheel rotation. See
figure 15.

55
ANSI B7.1-2000
GUARD TEST

Figure 15 – This figure illustrates

the guard test procedure. Note the
orientation of the guard relative to
the “no fragment zone” is optional

Exception:
Small granules are not considered fragments.
and
2. The guard shall not be separated from the
tool. No fasteners or mounting hardware
may enter the “NO FRAGMENTS” zone.
Deformation of the guard and/or move-
ment on the mounting is acceptable.
Three guards shall be tested. If all three
satisfy acceptance criteria 1 & 2 above, the
design is acceptable. If two of the three fail
either 1 or 2, the guard design is not accept-
able. If one of the three fails, then three
more guards shall be tested. If all three of
the second set satisfy 1 & 2 above, the
guard design is acceptable.
4.2.4.2 Portable air grinders E 4.2.4.2 Portable air grinders
Safety guards shall be designed and con- Since air grinders may have higher attainable
structed to meet the acceptance criteria of speeds than electric grinders due to possible
section 4.2.4.1.1 should an abrasive wheel governor malfunction, improper adjustment or
breakage occur at the grinder’s maximum excessive air supply pressure, guards conform-
attainable speed. ing to tables 4, 5, 6, and 7, may not provide the
prescribed protection. Guards are developed
Maximum attainable speed is defined as the
to be compatible with the characteristics of the
maximum speed which the tool can achieve
specific grinder, and tested in a manner similar
under the most adverse conditions of
to that prescribed in section 4.2.4.1.1.
misadjustment or malfunction of any speed
control devices, when supplied with the With the proper choice of test speed the
higher of the rated pressure or 90 psi portable electric test procedure can be used
(6.2 bar) air pressure. with portable air grinders.

56
 ANSI B7.1-2000
4.3 Stationary grinding
4.3.1 Guard exposure angles E 4.3.1 Guard exposure angles
The maximum exposure angles are specified Maximum guard openings are based on the
in the following paragraphs. The angle of fact that the line of flight of broken wheel
exposure shall be measured with the vertex pieces will be tangential in the direction of
at the center of the spindle and extended to rotation of the wheel.
the guard periphery. The maximum exposure
Note that all exposure angles are measured
angles shall not be exceeded.
from the center of the machine spindle.
Visors or other accessory equipment shall
not be included as a part of the guard when
measuring the guard opening, unless such
equipment has strength equal to that of the
guard.
4.3.2 Bench and pedestal grinders E 4.3.2 Bench and pedestal grinders
The angular exposure of the abrasive wheel
periphery and sides for safety guards used
on machines known as bench and pedestal
grinders shall not exceed 90° or one-fourth
of the periphery. This exposure shall begin
at a point not more than 65° above the
horizontal plane of the wheel spindle (see
figure 16 and illustration 50).

Illustration 50 – An example of a well-designed

guard for a bench grinder. Note that exposure
Figure 16
does not exceed the 90° maximum stipulated
Exception:
Wherever the nature of the work requires
contact with the wheel below the horizontal
plane of the spindle, the exposure shall not
exceed 125°. (See figure 17.)

Figure 17

57
ANSI B7.1-2000
4.3.2.1 Exposure adjustment, bench and E 4.3.2.1 Exposure adjustment, bench
pedestal grinders and pedestal grinders
Safety guards of the types described in sec- Figure 18 shows a satisfactory method of
tion 4.3.2 where the operator stands in front accomplishing exposure adjustment. Other
of the opening, shall be constructed so that methods that agree with the basic rule are
the maximum angular exposure above the also acceptable.
horizontal plane of the wheel spindle shall
Note that the exposure angle is always mea-
never be exceeded.
sured from the center of the wheel spindle.
Safety guards shall be constructed so that
the peripheral member or tongue guard can
be adjusted to the constantly decreasing
diameter of the wheel. The distance between
the wheel periphery and the peripheral mem-
ber or tongue guard shall never exceed 1 / 4 ".
The peripheral member or tongue guard are
an integral part of the wheel guard system
and shall be constructed and/or attached to
meet the strength requirements for the rest
of the guard.
Exception:
Bench grinders with wheels not greater than
5" in diameter operating at peripheral speeds
less than 5,000 SFPM with rated outputs not
greater than 1 / 10 HP need not conform to
spark arrestor (also called adjustable tongue)
requirements.

Figure 18 – Correct
The adjustable tongue gives required angular pro-
tection for all sizes of wheels used.

58
 ANSI B7.1-2000
4.3.3 Floorstand grinders
The angular exposure of the abrasive wheel
periphery and sides for safety guards used
on machines known as floor stands shall not
exceed 90° or 1 / 4 of the periphery. This expo-
sure shall begin at a point not more than 65°
above the horizontal plane of the wheel
spindle. (See figure 19, and section 4.4,
page 67.)
Exception: Wherever the nature of the work
requires contact with the wheel below the
horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure
shall not exceed 125° (see figure 20).

Figure 19 Figure 20

4.3.3.1 Floorstand grinders exposure ad- E 4.3.3.1 Floorstand grinders exposure

justment
Safety guards of the types where the opera-
tor stands in front of the opening shall be
constructed so that the maximum angular
exposure above the horizontal plane of the
wheel spindle shall never be exceeded. The
distance between the wheel periphery and
the adjustable tongue or the end of the pe-
ripheral member at the top of the guard
opening shall never exceed 1 / 4 ". (See figures
21, 22 and 23.)
adjustment
Figures 21 and 22 show two satisfactory
methods of accomplishing exposure adjust-
ment. These sketches are for purposes of
illustration only. Other methods that agree
with the basic rule are also acceptable. Fig-
ure 23 shows a condition that does not com-
ply with the requirements.
Note that the exposure angle is always mea-
sured from the center of the wheel spindle.

Figure 21 – Correct
Showing adjustable tongue giving required angu-
lar protection for all sizes of wheels used.

59
ANSI B7.1-2000

Figure 22 – Correct
Showing movable guard with opening small
enough to give required protection for small size
wheel used.

Figure 23 – Incorrect
Showing movable guard with size of opening
correct for full size wheel but too large for smaller
wheels.

4.3.3.1.1 Self-closing guard E 4.3.3.1.1 Self-closing guard

In order to protect all personnel who are in
the plane of rotation of the grinding wheel,
all floor stand grinders designed to be used
with 24" diameter wheels and larger, shall
be equipped with a guard which closes auto-
matically at the occurrence of a wheel break-
age (see illustration 51). Other guard de-
signs which provide equivalent protection to
The engineering concept of the self-closing
guard is very simple to understand. In the
event of a wheel breakage, the wheel pieces
fly tangentially outward. They strike, at an
angle, one or more paddle-like surfaces
which are fixed to a moveable gate located
within the primary guard. The kinetic energy
of the wheel is transferred to this gate, caus-

Illustration 51 – Two examples of floor stand grinders with automatically closing guards

60

the personnel in the plane of rotation of the
wheel may be used.
4.3.3.1.2 Inspection and maintenance of
self-closing guards
The self closing guard shall be inspected
every time a wheel is changed. The inspec-
tion shall include the following checks:
1. Check the paddle-like underlying surfaces
which cause the guard member to rotate
when struck by broken wheel pieces. Cor-
rect for any wear or damage according to
the machine builders’ recommendation.
2. Check the spark arrester, (the longer
tab, also called tongue, located at the
leading edge of the rotating guard mem-
ber), for wear. Repair or replace if worn.
This tab, on some grinders, is part of the
speed control system and it is important
that it be maintained properly.
The self closing guard shall be mechanically
operated every six (6) months. The shear pin
shall be removed and the internal guard shall
be moved through its full travel. The shear
pin shall be replaced with a new shear pin of
equal mechanical properties.
4.3.3.1.3 Design criteria for a self-closing
guard
1. The guard shall be designed to retain all
pieces of the wheel that are large enough
to cause serious bodily injury to the op-
erator.
2. The guard shall be designed to operate
properly if the largest wheel the grinder
is designed to use breaks at a speed of
17,000 SFPM.
ANSI B7.1-2000
ing it to instantly swing shut so as to prevent
broken pieces from escaping from inside the
primary machine guard. High speed photog-
raphy shows the effectiveness of this guard
design. When a wheel breakage occurs, the
piece of wheel that actually leaves the open-
ing of the guard was not the piece facing the
operator at the instantaneous moment of
breakage. The piece was one well within the
guard, but headed for the guard opening due
to tangential rotational forces imparted to it
just prior to breakage.
E 4.3.3.1.2 Inspection and maintenance
of self closing guards
The self closing guard is the last protective
device the operator has in case of an acci-
dental wheel breakage. It is important that it
work properly at the time of a wheel break-
age. Since wheel breakages are very rare,
maintenance of this device can be easily
neglected. Only by checking the guard
mechanism before each wheel is mounted
can you be assured that the self-closing
guard will function properly.
Shear pins must be replaced with the same
mechanical strength pin that the guard was
originally designed for. Higher strength pins
may not shear, resulting in subsequent fail-
ure of the guard.
E 4.3.3.1.3 Design criteria for a self clos-
ing guard
Overspeeding is a major cause of breakages
for these types of wheels. It is also the
breakage condition that would subject the
guard to its maximum loads.
61
ANSI B7.1-2000
4.3.4 Cylindrical grinders E 4.3.4 Cylindrical grinders
The maximum angular exposure of the abra-
sive wheel periphery and sides for safety
guards used on cylindrical grinding machines
shall not exceed 180°. This exposure shall
begin at a point not more than 65° above the
horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See
figure 24 and illustration 52, and section 4.4,
page 67.)

Illustration 52 – A cylindrical grinding machine

employing a well designed guard

Figure 24

4.3.5 Surface grinders E 4.3.5 Surface grinders

The maximum angular exposure of the abra-
sive wheel periphery and sides for safety
guards used on surface grinding machines
where grinding is done on the wheel periph-
ery shall not exceed 150°. This exposure
shall begin at a point not less than 15° below
the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle
(see figure 25 and illustration 53). For sur-
face grinders using cup wheels, see section
4.3.14, band type guards, page 66.

Illustration 53 – This surface grinder has a

well-designed guard conforming to basic
requirements. The guard is designed to allow
easy access to the wheel

Figure 25

62
 ANSI B7.1-2000
4.3.6 Swing frame grinders
4.3.6.1 Swing frame grinders using E 4.3.6.1 Swing frame grinders using
straight wheels straight wheels
The maximum angular exposure of the grind-
ing wheel periphery and sides for safety
guards used on machines known as swing
frame grinding machines shall not exceed
180°, and the top half of the wheel shall be
enclosed at all times. (See figure 26 and
illustration 54.)

4.3.6.2 Swing frame grinders with cup

wheels
Swing frame grinders made specifically for
cup wheels shall have wheel guard coverage
Illustration 54 – This swing frame grinder has
of 180° on the side toward the operator.
an excellent guard. Note that the guard
encloses at least 180° of the wheel.
4.3.7 Semiautomatic snagging machines E 4.3.7 Semiautomatic snagging machines
The maximum angular exposure of the abra-
sive wheel periphery and sides for safety
guards used on grinders known as semiauto-
matic snagging machines shall not exceed
180° and the top half of the wheel shall be
enclosed at all times. (See figure 26 and
illustration 55.)

Illustration 55 – An automatic snagging

machine grinding carbon steel
Figure 26
4.3.8 Top grinding
Where the work is applied to the wheel above the
horizontal center line, the exposure of the abra-
sive wheel periphery shall be as small as pos-
sible and shall not exceed 60 °. (See figure 27.)

Figure 27

63
ANSI B7.1-2000
4.3.9 Masonry saws E 4.3.9 Masonry saws
On machines specifically designed and used
for masonry sawing (see section 1.3.12,
page 13), the maximum angular exposure of
the cutting-off wheel periphery for safety
guards shall not exceed 180°. (See figures
28, 29 and illustration 56).
18

18
E

E
°M °M
R

R
0

AX SU AX SU
IM U M E X P O IM U M E X P O

Illustration 56 – Cutting common brick with a

Figure 28 – Accept- Figure 29 – Preferred metal centered segmental diamond abrasive
able configuration configuration wheel on a masonry saw
(clockwise direction
of rotation)

Guards for these machines specifically de- It is recognized that advancements in mate-
signed for masonry sawing, using only steel rial science may allow machine guards to be
centered diamond cutting-off wheels not ex- developed with strength characteristics equal
ceeding 16,000 SFPM, shall use steel guards to, if not greater than, the 12 gauge (.105")
of at least 12 gauge (.105") thickness for thick steel required.
wheels of all diameters.
4.3.10 Concrete saws E 4.3.10 Concrete saws
On machines specifically designed and used
for concrete sawing (see section 1.3.4,
page 12) the maximum angular exposure of
the cutting-off wheel periphery for safety
guards shall not exceed 180°. (See figures
28, 29 and illustration 57.)
Machines specifically designed for concrete
sawing, using only steel centered diamond
cutting-off wheels not exceeding 16,000
SFPM, shall use steel guards of at least to
12 gauge (.105") thickness for wheels of all
diameters.

Illustration 57 – Cutting a concrete deck with a

gasoline-powered concrete saw

It is recognized that advancements in mate-

rial science may allow machine guards to be
developed with strength characteristics equal
to, if not greater than, the 12 gauge (.105")
thick steel required.

64
 ANSI B7.1-2000
4.3.11 Wall saws E 4.3.11 Wall saws
On machines specifically designed and used
for wall sawing (see section 1.3.26, page 16),
the maximum angular exposure of the cutting-
off wheel periphery for safety guards shall not
exceed 180° (see figures 28 and 29).
Machines specifically designed for wall saw-
ing, using only steel centered diamond cut-
ting-off wheels not exceeding 16,000 SFPM,
shall use aluminum guards of at least .090"
thickness for wheels of all diameters.
4.3.12 Rotary tool (burr) grinding
On machines designed and used for grinding
steel or carbide rotary tools (see section
1.3.18, page 14) the maximum angular ex-
posure for safety guards shall not exceed
180°. This exposure shall begin at a point
not more than 65° above the horizontal plane
of the wheel spindle. (See figure 30.)

Illustration 58 – Wall saw securely mounted to

work surface

It is recognized that advancements in mate-

rial science may allow machine guards to be
developed with strength characteristics equal
Figure 30 to, if not greater than, the .090" thick alumi-
num required.
4.3.13 Cutting-off wheel grinding
On machines specifically designed and used
for cutting off material, the maximum angular
exposure of the cutting-off wheel periphery for
safety guards shall not exceed 180° (see fig-
ure 31) and the guard shall be designed ac-
cording to the specifications listed in table 8.

Figure 31

65
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 8 – Minimum basic thicknesses for peripheral and side members
for safety guards used with cutting-off wheels *

Cutting-Off Wheel Diameters — inches

Material Used in
Construction of Maximum Thickness Speed not Over 11 Over 20 Over 30 Over 48
Guard of Cutting-Off Wheel to Exceed 6 through through through through through
11 inches 20 inches 30 inches 48 inches 72 inches
SFPM A B A B A B A B A B

Structural Steel (Min. 1/2 inch or less 14,200 1/16 1/16 3/32 3/32 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4
Tensile Strength
60,000 psi) 1/2 inch or less 16,000 1/8 3/32 1/8 1/8 3/16 1/8 1/4 3/16 5/16 1/4

The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording equal
or superior protection are also acceptable.
*See section 1.4.18, page 24, for cutting-off wheel definition.

4.3.14 Band type guards for stationary E 4.3.14 Band type guards for stationary
grinding machines grinding machines
Band type guards shall conform to the fol-
lowing general specifications:
a. The bands shall be of steel plate or other
material of equal or greater strength. They
shall be continuous, the ends being ei-
ther riveted, bolted or welded together in
such a manner as to leave the inside free
from projections.
b. The inside diameter of the band shall not
be more than 1" larger than the largest
rotating diameter of the wheel or its
holder.
c. The band shall be of sufficient width and
its position kept adjusted so that at no
time will the wheel protrude beyond the
edge of the band a distance greater than Illustration 59 – An example of a well
indicated in table 9, page 68, or the wall constructed band type guard
thickness (W), whichever of these di-
mensions is smaller.
Exception:
Band type guards used in conjunction with
segments individually chucked in suitable
holding mechanisms to form a grinding unit
may have a door for access through the
band to facilitate segment change and ad-
justment.
As a guide for the construction of band type
guards, figure 32, and table 10, page 68,
have been prepared. Other designs afford-
ing equal or better protection are also ac-
ceptable.

66

Figure 32
4.4 Construction guide for steel guards
The recommendations listed in tables 4
through 12 are guides for the conditions
stated. Other material, designs, or dimen-
sions affording equal or superior protection
are also acceptable.
Exception A:
Machines specifically designed for concrete
sawing, using only steel centered diamond
cutting-off wheels not exceeding 16,000
SFPM, shall use steel guards of at least
12 gauge (.105") thickness for wheels of all
diameters.
Exception B:
Machines specifically designed for wall saw-
ing, using only steel centered diamond cut-
ting-off wheels not exceeding 16,000 SFPM,
shall use aluminum guards of at least .090"
thickness for wheels of all diameters.
ANSI B7.1-2000
Illustration 60 – A properly constructed band
type guard. Notice that the exposure of the
abrasive wheels is in conformance with the
requirements listed in table 9.
E 4.4 Construction guide for steel guards
When steel centered diamond cutting-off
wheels are operated properly; i.e. at the
correct speed and in an undamaged condi-
tion; there is no risk of the failure of the steel
center. The only risk is from small particles
of the material being cut or possibly the
small diamond segments coming off the steel
center. As the peripheral speed of all diam-
eters of steel centered diamond cutting-off
wheels is about the same, the potential en-
ergy level of these projectiles is the same
regardless of wheel diameter. The materials
listed in exceptions A and B have proven
their capability of preventing through pen-
etration of the above relatively low mass
items. Thus, it is not necessary to manufac-
ture guards of the thickness of material as
required for abrasive-type cutting-off wheels
as shown in table 8.
67
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 9 – Exposure versus wheel thickness

Overall Thickness Maximum Exposure

of Wheel (T) of Wheel (C)
Inches Inches
1/2 1/4
1 1/2
2 3/4
3 1
4 1-1/2
5 and over 2

Table 10 – Guide for construction of band type guards; maximum wheel speed 7000 SFPM

Minimum Maximum Distance

Minimum Material Minimum Diameter
Diameter of Wheel Thickness of Band Between Centers of
Specifications of Rivets
A Rivets
inches inches inches inches
Sheet Steel min.
tensile strength Under 8 1/16 3/16 3/4
60,000 psi 8 to 24 1/8 1/4 1
Over 24 to 30 1/4 3/8 1-1/4

Table 11 – Guide for construction of drawn steel guards for wheels 2" thick
and less, 10" and less in diameter. Used on bench and pedestal grinders.

Material Used in Construction Maximum Thickness Wheel Diameter — inches

of Guard Sheet Steel of Wheel
Minimum Tensile Strength 60,000 psi Over 5 Over 8
2 through 5
through 8 through 10
inches
For Speeds Up Through (SFPM) A B A B A B
5,000 2 1/16 1/16 3/32 1/16 3/32 1/16
9,500 2 1/16 1/16 3/32 1/16
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording
equal or superior protection are also applicable.

Illustration 61 – Shows the guard wall symbols "A" and "B" used in tables 8, 11 and 12

68
 Table 12 – Minimum basic thickness of peripheral and side members for abrasive wheel safety guards

ABRASIVE WHEEL DIAMETERS

Material Material Maximum Over 6 Over 12 Over 16 Over 20 Over 24 Over 30
Satisfactory used in Thickness of 3 through
6 inches through through through through through through
for Speeds Construction Abrasive 12 inches 16 inches 20 inches 24 inches 30 inches 48 inches
up to of Guard Wheel
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
inches inches inches inches inches inches inches inches
2 1/4 1/4 3/8 5/16 1/2 3/8 5/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 1 3/4 1-1/4 1
Gray Iron 4 5/16 5/16 1/6 5/16 1/2 3/8 3/4 5/8 1 5/8 1-1/8 3/4 1-3/8 1
8000 SFPM (Minimum 6 3/8 5/16 1/2 7/16 5/8 1/2 1 5/8 1-1/8 3/4 1-1/4 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8
Tensile Strength 8 — — 5/8 9/16 7/8 3/4 1 3/4 1-1/8 3/4 1-1/4 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8
20,000 psi)
10 — — 3/4 11/16 7/8 3/4 1 3/4 1-1/8 3/4 1-1/4 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8
16 — — — — 1-1/8 1 1-1/4 1 1-5/16 1 1-7/16 1-1/16 1-3/4 1-3/8
20 — — — — — — 1-3/8 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-1/8 1-1/2 1-3/8 2 1-5/8
2 1/4 5/16 3/8 5/16 1/2 3/8 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 3/4 1 7/8
4 5/16 5/16 3/8 5/16 1/2 3/8 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 3/4 1-1/8 7/8
Malleable Iron 6 3/8 5/16 1/2 7/16 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 5/8 1 3/4 1-1/4 7/8
9000 SFPM (Minimum
Tensile Strength 8 — — 1/2 7/16 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 5/8 1 3/4 1-1/4 7/8
50,000 psi) 10 — — 1/2 7/16 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 5/8 1 3/4 1-1/4 7/8
16 — — — — 13/16 11/16 13/16 11/16 1 3/4 1-1/8 7/8 1-3/8 1
20 — — — — — — 7/8 3/4 1 3/4 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8
2 1/4 1/4 5/16 5/16 3/8 3/8 1/2 7/16 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 3/4
4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 9/16 1/2 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 1 3/4
Steel Castings 6 3/8 1/4 3/4 5/8 3/4 5/8 3/4 5/8 13/16 11/16 13/16 11/16 1-1/8 3/4
16000 SFPM (Minimum
Tensile Strength 8 — — 7/8 3/4 7/8 3/4 7/8 3/4 7/8 3/4 15/16 13/16 1-3/8 1
60,000 psi) 10 — — 1 7/8 1 7/8 1 1 1-1/8 15/16 1-1/8 1 1-7/16 1-1/16
16 — — — — 1-1/4 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/8 1-13/16 1-7/16
20 — — — — — — 1-3/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/4 1-7/16 1-5/16 2-1/16 1-11/16
2 1/8 1/16 5/16 1/4 5/16 1/4 5/16 1/4 5/16 1/4 3/8 5/16 1/2 3/8
4 1/8 1/16 3/8 5/16 3/8 5/16 3/8 5/16 3/8 5/16 3/8 5/16 1/2 3/8
Structural Steel 6 3/16 1/16 1/2 3/8 7/16 3/8 7/16 3/8 7/16 3/8 7/16 3/8 3/4 1/2
16000 SFPM (Minimum
Tensile Strength 8 — — 1/2 3/8 9/16 7/16 9/16 7/16 9/16 7/16 5/8 1/2 3/4 1/2
60,000 psi) 10 — — 9/16 7/16 5/8 1/2 5/8 1/2 5/8 1/2 5/8 1/2 7/8 5/8
16 — — — — 5/8 9/16 3/4 5/8 3/4 5/8 13/16 11/16 1-1/16 13/16
20 — — — — — — 13/16 11/16 13/16 11/16 7/8 3/4 1-3/16 15/16
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording equal or superior protection are also acceptable.

69
ANSI B7.1-2000
ANSI B7.1-2000
4.4.1 Material requirements and minimum
dimensions for portable grinding ma-
chines
See tables 4, 5, 6 and 7 for minimum thick-
ness of peripheral and side members for
various types of safety guards and classes
of service for portable grinders, as referred
to in section 3.1. The recommendations given
in tables 4, 5, 6 and 7 and figures 11, 12, 13
and 14 are guides for the conditions stated.
Other materials, designs or dimensions af-
fording equal or superior protection are also
acceptable.
4.4.2 Material requirements and minimum
dimensions for stationary grinding ma-
chines
See tables 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 for minimum
basic thickness of peripheral and side mem-
bers for various types of safety guards and
classes of service for stationary grinders, as
referred to in section 3.1. The recommenda-
tions given in tables 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 and
figures 16 to 32 are guides for the conditions
stated. Other materials, designs or dimen-
sions affording equal or superior protection
are also acceptable.
4.4.3 Optional materials
If materials other than those given in tables
4 to 12 and figures 11 to 14 and 16 to 32 are
used, the thickness of the peripheral and
side members shall be such that the result-
ant safety guard will provide equal or better
protection than a similar guard constructed
according to the tables and figures stated
above.
4.4.4 Cutting-off wheels over 16" diam-
eter operating at higher than standard
speeds
Cutting-off wheels larger than 16", operating
in excess of the SFPM specified in this stan-
dard, shall have wheel guards constructed
of materials and using methods verified by
the manufacturer to be suitable.

70
 ANSI B7.1-2000
4.4.5 Wheel guard with removable side covers
Radial strength of the guard assembly shall
prevent distortion of the peripheral member
in the event of wheel breakage.
4.4.6 Material specifications
The minimum thickness specifications given
in tables 4 to 12 are based on the following:
American National Standard Specification for
Gray Iron Casting, G25 1-1964 (R1972)
(ASTM A48-64 (1971)).
American National Specification for Mild-to-
Medium Strength Carbon-Steel Castings
for General Application, G50 1-1972
(ASTM 27-72).
ASTM A47-74, Specification for Malleable
Iron Castings.
ASTM A283-74, Specification for Low and
Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates of Structural Quality.
ASTM A663-72, Specification for Merchant
Quality Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars
Subject to Mechanical Property Require-
ments.
ASTM A675-72, Specifications for Special
Quality Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars
Subject to Mechanical Property Require-
ments.
Other material affording equal or superior
protection and which lend themselves equally
well to the desired type of construction may
also be used.

71
ANSI B7.1-2000

Explanatory Information
(NOT PART OF ANSI STANDARD)
5 Flanges

5.1 General requirements E 5.1 General requirements

All abrasive wheels shall be mounted be-
tween flanges which shall not be less than
one-third the diameter of the wheel.
Exceptions:
1. M o u n t e d wheels (section 1.4.19,
page 25.)
2. Portable cup, cone or plug wheels with
threaded inserts or projecting studs.
These wheels shall be mounted against
a straight unrelieved flange. (See
table 17, page 83.)
3. Abrasive disc wheels (inserted nut, in-
serted washer and projecting stud type).
4. Plate mounted wheels.
5. Cylinder, cup or segmental wheels that
are mounted in chucks.
6. Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels (See sec-
tion 5.4, page 77).
The major stresses produced in operating
abrasive wheel tend to combine and become
greatest at the hole. It is, therefore, impor-
tant that stresses due to mounting and driv-
ing act as far from the holes as practicable.
This is best accomplished by using flanges
at least as large as those listed in tables 14
through 21, pages 81 through 86.
Flanges should be at least the minimum
diameters specified, identical in diameter and
radial bearing surface to avoid cross bend-
ing pressures and stresses in the wheel struc-
ture. In many cutting-off operations, better
results may be obtained by using flanges
larger than the minimum requirement.
Blotters (compressible washers) should al-
ways be used between metal flanges and
abrasive wheel surfaces for uniform distribu-
tion of flange pressure.
See section 5.6, page 78, for exceptions
regarding the use of blotters.
Flanges must be checked periodically for
flatness, burrs and wear.

7. Internal wheels less than 2" in diameter.

8. Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels (Ter-

razzo).

9. Cutting-off wheels, Types 1 and 27A (see

sections 5.1.1 and 5.1.2.1, pages 73
and 74).

Illustration 62 – Note the flanges used here are

at least 1/3 the wheel diameter, finished all
over, and free of rough or sharp edges

72
 ANSI B7.1-2000
5.1.1 Type 1 cutting-off wheels E 5.1.1 Type 1 cutting-off wheels
Type 1 cutting-off wheels shall be mounted Exceptions to the standard requiring that
between properly relieved flanges which have flanges be 1/4 of the wheel diameter have
matching bearing surfaces. Such flanges been made for steel-centered diamond abra-
shall be at least one-fourth the wheel diam- sive cutting-off wheels. This is because these
eter. See table 14, page 81, column C, for steel-centered wheels are not only stronger,
proper bearing surface. but also more ductile than bonded abrasive
wheels. Exception A allows for flanges to be
Exception A: 1/5 the diameter of the wheel, while excep-
Machines specifically designed and used for tion B allows flanges to be 1/6 the diameter.
masonry cutting (see section 1.3.12, Exception D for wall saws allows flanges
page 13), using only reinforced bonded abra- smaller than 1/6 the diameter for wheels
sive cutting-off wheels and steel centered larger than 30", but only when proper step
diamond cutting-off wheels, shall use flanges cutting procedures are used. The reason for
not less than 4" diameter for wheels 18" and this is that wall saws are rigidly anchored to
20" diameter. the wall that they are cutting and that by step
cutting, the larger diameter wheels are al-
Exception B: ways in the cut and supported by the cut
Machines specifically designed and used for whenever they are experiencing cutting
concrete sawing (see section 1.3.4, page 12), loads. The combination of both of these sub-
using only steel centered diamond abrasive stantially reduces side forces on and deflec-
cutting-off wheels 20" diameter and larger, tion of the wheel, thereby eliminating the
shall use flanges not less than 1 / 6 the wheel requirement of having large diameter flanges
diameter. for wheel support to resist these side forces.
The core thickness minimums given are only
Exception C:
minimum guidelines if the wheel in question
On portable saws using reinforced bonded
is the largest wheel in use. But, in step
abrasive cutting-off wheels up to and includ-
cutting, the smaller diameter diamond abra-
ing 8 1/ 4 " diameter, the diameter of the flanges
sive wheels must cut sufficient clearance for
may be less than one-fourth of the wheel
the larger wheels. For example: if the 48"
diameter, providing the flanges are in con-
wheel has diamond segment of .210" wide
formance with table 15, page 82.
with a core of .180" thick, then the 24" wheel
usually has segments of .250" wide with a
Exception D:
core of .155", while the 30" through 42"
Machines specifically designed and used for
wheels have segments of .210" wide with
wall sawing (see section 1.3.26, page 16),
cores of .155 - .165" thick.
using only steel centered diamond abrasive
cutting-off wheels, 20" diameter and larger,
up to and including 60" diameter, shall use
flanges of not less than 5" diameter, provid-
ing a step-cutting procedure is followed dur-
ing the sawing operation.
The step-cutting procedure shall proceed as
follows:
A. Start initial cutting pass with a maximum
24" diameter wheel.
B. After this initial diamond wheel has cut to
its full depth, subsequent passes are
made with wheels of 6" incrementally
increased diameters, i.e., 30", 36", 42",
etc.

73
ANSI B7.1-2000
C. The steel centered diamond cutting-off
wheel’s core thickness must comply with
the following chart:
Wheel Diameter Minimum Thickness
24" .130"
30" .130"
36" .135"
42" .148"
48" .148"
54" .148"
60" .175" E 5.1.2.1 Type 27A cutting-off wheels
A specific warning shall be provided on all
wall sawing equipment and on all wall saw
diamond wheels stating that the above step-
cutting procedure must be followed when-
ever flange diameters in use are less than 1 / 4
the diameter of the diamond wheel in use.
5.1.2 Flanges — Types 27, 27A, 28, 29
wheels
5.1.2.1 Type 27A cutting-off wheels
Type 27A cutting-off wheels are designed to
be mounted by means of flat, unrelieved
flanges having matching bearing surfaces
and which may be less than one-third, but
shall not be less than one-fourth the wheel
diameter. Illustration 63 – The Type 27A wheel
is mounted between flat unrelieved
flanges of equal bearing surfaces

E 5.1.2.2 Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels

5.1.2.2 Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels larger larger than 5" diameter
than 5" diameter
Type 27, 28 and 29 wheels larger than 5"
require specially designed adaptors because
of their shape and usage. (See section
1.4.14, page 22 and section 1.4.17, page 23.)
The adaptor (back flange) shall extend be-
yond the central hub, or raised portion, and
contact the wheel to counteract the side
pressure on the wheel in use. The adaptor
nut, which is less than the minimum one-
third diameter of the wheel, fits in the de-
pressed side of the wheel to prevent inter-
ference in side grinding. These specially de-
signed adaptors shall be used to mount only Illustration 64 – 7" and 9" diameter Types 27
Types 27, 28 and 29 reinforced organic and 28 wheels, because of their shape,
bonded wheels. The adapters are exempt require specially designed adaptors
from the flange test specified in section 5.2.1.

74
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the E 5.1.2.3 Type 27 wheels 5" diameter and
manufacturer may not require an inside nut smaller
and shall not be reused.
5.1.2.3 Type 27 wheels 5" diameter and
smaller
Type 27 wheels 5" diameter and smaller with
3
/ 8 " arbor holes shall be mounted with adapt-
ers as described in section 5.1.2.2 (see il-
lustration 64). Type 27 wheels with 5 / 8 " or 7 / 8 "
diameter arbor holes shall be mounted with
Illustration 65 – Mounting condition
either adapters as described in 5.1.2.2 or
shown must have flanges at least
matched flanges (see illustration 65) pro-
one third wheel diameter
vided the matched flanges have outside di-
ameters of at least 1 / 3 the diameter of the
wheel or the outside flange diameters equal
to the K dimension (minus machining toler- E 5.1.3 Flange types
ance required) shown in annex C, table C-3
for the size wheel in question.
J = Df – 2C (Min.)
5.1.3 Flange types
There are four general types of flanges (see T E
illustration 66):
G C
A. Straight Relieved. See figure 34, table 14, Df
page 81; figure 35, table 15, and figure A. Straight relieved
36, table 16, page 82.

B. S t r a i g h t U n r e l i e v e d . S e e f i g u r e 3 7 , T
table 17, page 83.
Df
B. Straight unrelieved
C. Adaptor. See figures 38, 39, 41, and 42,
tables 18, 19, and 20, pages 83 to 86. Df
T is effective thickness
D. Sleeve Adaptor. See figures 40 and 43, E T=E+F

tables 19 and 21, pages 84 and 86.

F C
U
Regardless of flange type used, the wheel
shall always be guarded as listed in sec- H
tion 4, page 50. Blotters shall be used as C. Adaptor
listed in section 5.6, page 78.
Df
T is effective thickness
E F T=E+F

C
U
5.1.3.1 Straight flanges, relieved and un-
relieved
H
The following tables show minimum dimen- D. Sleeve adaptor
sions for straight relieved (tables 14, 15, and
Illustration 66 – Four general types of flanges

75
ANSI B7.1-2000
16, pages 81 and 82) and unrelieved flanges E 5.1.3.2 Adaptor flanges
(table 17, page 83) for use with wheels with
Flanges of this type are frequently used with
small holes that fit directly on the machine
organic bonded snagging wheels having large
spindle.
holes.
5.1.3.2 Adaptor flanges
Inorganic wheels with large holes are not
Tables 18, 19, 20, and 21, pages 83 to 86, recommended for rough snagging operations.
show minimum dimensions for adaptor
E 5.1.3.3 Sleeve adaptor flanges
flanges for use with wheels having holes
larger than the spindle. In mounting large hole wheels, it is most
important that equipment and mounting pro-
cedures are satisfactory to avoid distortion
5.1.3.3 Sleeve adaptor flanges of the flanges. Careful mounting procedures,
using new clean blotters and gradual criss-
Tables 19 and 21, pages 84 and 86, show
cross tightening of the mounting screws, are
minimum dimensions for flanges that are an
important. Excessive tightening beyond that
integral part of wheel sleeves.
necessary to drive the wheel without slip-
page results in abnormal stress near the
hole. This must be avoided.
E 5.2 Design, material and dimensions
Flanges must be at least the minimum diam-
eter specified, identical in diameter and ra-
dial bearing surface to avoid cross bending
5.2 Design, material and dimensions pressures and stresses in the wheel struc-
ture. Flanges must be of sufficient rigidity to
Flanges shall be of such design as to satis-
resist “springing” from mounting pressure.
factorily transmit the driving torque from the
This “springing” can be detected by inserting
spindle to the abrasive wheel.
a feeler gauge between bearing area of the
Flanges shall be designed with respect to flange and the wheel.
rigidity and flatness so that when tightened,
Care must be taken to clean the flanges
the radial width of bearing surface of contact
thoroughly before mounting a wheel. On cer-
on the wheel shall be maintained.
tain operations, blotters have a tendency to
Note: See section 5.8, page 80, for mainte- adhere to the flange.
nance of flanges.
Flanges shall be designed in accordance
with the materials and dimensions shown in
tables 14 through 21, pages 81 through 86.
Exception:
If material other than that specified in the
listed tables is used, the resulting flange
shall have strength and rigidity equal to or
greater than a flange made according to the
tables; flanges for bench, pedestal, and por-
table electric grinders shall be acceptable
when tested in accordance with section 5.2.1.
5.2.1 Flange test for bench, pedestal and
portable electric grinders
A flat steel plate having a diameter of at
least 2" more than that of the flanges being
investigated is to be mounted as shown in

76
 ANSI B7.1-2000
figure 33, page 77, and loaded in accor-
dance with table 13. Blotters or other com-
pressible materials are not to be employed
between the steel and the flanges. A 0.002"
feeler gauge is then to be applied between
each flange and the steel plate at all loca-
tions on the periphery of each flange. The
flange is acceptable if the feeler gauge can-
not be inserted. (See table 13, page 78.)

E 5.3 Finish and balance

Flanges that are out of balance can increase
Figure 33 the imbalance of the abrasive wheel, spindle,
and flange assembly beyond acceptable lim-
5.3 Finish and balance
its. This could create a condition which may
Flanges shall be dimensionally accurate and cause unsatisfactory wheel performance or in
in balance. They shall be flat and have no extreme cases contribute to wheel breakage.
rough surfaces or sharp edges.
On precision grinding machines equipped
with balance adjustment devices, wheel/
spindle assemblies should be corrected for
imbalance by utilizing such devices.
E 5.4 Uniformity of diameter
If flanges are not of uniform diameter (ex-
cept as noted) dangerous cross-bending
stresses in the wheel will be created when
5.4 Uniformity of diameter
flanges are tightened.
Both flanges, of any type, between which a
wheel is mounted, shall be of the same di-
ameter and have equal bearing surface.
Exceptions:
A. Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels with adap-
tors.
B. Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels with
tapered K dimension. See section 1.4.22,
page 26.
C. Internal wheels less than 2" in diameter.

Illustration 67 – Proper and improper method

of mounting wheels having small holes

77
ANSI B7.1-2000

Illustration 68 – Proper and improper method

of mounting wheels having large holes
5.5 Recess and undercut E 5.5 Recess and undercut
Relieved flanges made according to figures The undercut, dimension U in figures 38, 39,
34 and 35, and tables 14 and 15, pages 81 40, 41, 42 and 43, insures there is no bind-
and 82, shall be recessed (at least as listed) ing between the flange and the wheel due to
on the sides of the flanges which are placed a chamfer remaining when the flange is ma-
next to the wheel. chined.
Flanges of the adaptor or sleeve type (fig-
ures 38, 39, 40, 41, 42 and 43, pages 83-86)
shall be undercut so that there will be no
bearing on the sides of the wheel within 1 / 8 "
of the arbor hole.

Table 13 – Test load for determining flange rigidity for bench, pedestal,
and portable electric grinders

Diameter of Spindle Maximum Diameter of Load P

Thread in Inches Flange in Inches Pounds
Thru 1/2 2 720
Over 1/2 thru 3/4 2 11/16 960
Over 3/4 thru 1 3 3/8 1700
The above values of clamping force are sufficiently high that normal tightening of spindle nuts will
not cause force in excess of values given.

5.6 Blotters E 5.6 Blotters

A blotter (compressible washer) shall always
be used between each flange and the abra-
sive wheel surface to ensure uniform distri-
bution of flange pressure. Blotters shall cover
the entire flange contact area.
New blotters shall be used each time a wheel
is mounted unless blotters are affixed to the
wheel by the grinding wheel manufacturer.
Loose blotters shall not be reused when
mounting a new wheel or remounting a partly
Care must be taken to clean the flanges
thoroughly before mounting a wheel, since
blotters will occasionally adhere to the flange.
Blotters are used for several reasons. They
tend to cushion the pressure of the flanges
against high points or uneven surfaces and
distribute the pressure evenly. They prevent
damage to the surfaces of the flanges from
the abrasive surface of the wheel. They pro-
vide a better coefficient of friction than would

78
 ANSI B7.1-2000
used wheel. Scuffed or damaged blotters be obtained between the flange and the
shall not be used. wheel, thereby providing better transmission
of the driving power to the wheel.
Exceptions:
Blotters need not be used with the following Blotters are not required on cutting-off op-
types of wheels: erations, however it is permissible to use
them and it is preferred that blotters be used
1. Mounted wheels. on dry cutting-off applications.
2. Abrasive disc and Type 2 wheels which
are mounted by means of inserted nuts,
inserted washers, or projecting studs.
3. Plate mounted wheels.
4. Wheels that are mounted in chucks such
as cylinders and segmental wheels.
5. Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels.
6. Cutting-off, Type 1 and Type 27A wheels.
7. Internal wheels less than 2" in diameter.
8. Diamond and cubic boron nitride wheels
with metal or carbon fiber cores.
9. Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels (Ter-
razzo), blotters applied to flat side of
wheel only.
5.7 Driving flange E 5.7 Driving flange
The driving flange shall be integral with the The driving flange must be checked on a
spindle, or shall be mounted on the spindle regularly maintained schedule for any dam-
in a manner to provide a positive rotational age or runout.
driving action.
Exception:
On bench grinders with wheels 8" or less in
diameter and with rated outputs not greater
than 3 / 4 horsepower, the flange need not be
secured other than by friction.
The bearing surface of the driving flange
shall run true.
5.7.1 Spacers, multiple wheel mounting E 5.7.1 Spacers, multiple wheel mounting

When more than one wheel is mounted be-
tween a single set of flanges, wheels may be
cemented together or separated by specially
designed spacers. When used, such spacers
shall be equal in diameter to the mounting
flanges and have equal bearing surfaces.
Spacers less than .050" thick, used between
wheels which are mounted between a single
set of flanges, shall be equal in diameter to
the flanges. They shall be made of low com-
pressibility material such as brass or soft
copper. Blotter material shall not be used in
place of or in conjunction with thin spacers.
In certain multiple wheel operations where
wheel slippage may be a problem it may be
necessary to key or otherwise securely fas-
ten both the spacers and the outside flange
to the spindle.
Soft compressible blotter material is not gen-
erally satisfactory for use as a spacer. Spac-
ers should be of material rated as low com-
pressibility such as soft copper or brass.

79
ANSI B7.1-2000
Spacers thicker than .050" may be steel and
spacers thicker than 3 / 8 " shall be made of
steel. When steel spacers are used, their
diameters shall equal flange diameters, and
the spacers shall be relieved so that bearing
surfaces equal flange bearing surfaces. Blot-
ters shall be used between steel spacers
and wheels.
Spacers used between flanges and wheels
to reduce the effective spindle length shall
be made of steel. These spacers shall have
the same outside and relief diameters as the
flanges and shall be flat and parallel. Blot-
ters shall be used between spacers and
wheels.
A spacer used between a driving flange and
abrasive wheel shall be securely fastened to
the spindle or driving flange to transmit the
driving torque from the spindle. (This section
does not apply to steel-centered diamond
cutting-off wheels used in grooving and grind-
ing applications.)
When mounting wheels which have not been
cemented together, or ones which do not
utilize separate spacers, care must be exer-
cised to use wheels specifically manufac-
tured for that purpose. (This section does
not apply to steel-centered diamond cutting-
off wheels used in grooving and grinding
applications.)
5.8 Repairs and maintenance E 5.8 Repairs and maintenance
All flange bearing surfaces shall be main- An improperly maintained flange is an un-
tained in good condition. None of the follow- safe and ineffective flange. It is unsafe be-
ing conditions shall exist on the mounting cause uneven pressures may cause exces-
surface: sive stress in the wheel and cause it to
brake. It is ineffective because the flange
1. Warpage
pressure is not distributed uniformly over the
2. Burrs on the bearing surface contact (gripping) area. This is especially
true of wheel sleeves or adapter flanges.
3. Excessive wear (thickness or diameter)
4. Out of truth (runout)
If any or all of these conditions exist, the
flange shall be replaced or remachined to
correct the above conditions before reuse.
When refacing or truing flanges, care shall
be exercised to make certain that the mini-
mum dimensions are maintained.
Flanges that do not conform to tables 14
through 21, pages 81 through 86, shall be
replaced.

80
 ANSI B7.1-2000
5.9 Recessed wheels
Flanges used on recessed wheels shall never
interfere with the corner radius of the grind-
ing wheel recess. For sleeve adaptor type
flanges, the recess should be at least 3 / 8 "
larger than the flange.

J = Df – 2C (Min.)

T Figure 34 – Driving flange

E
secured to spindle. See
section 5.7, page 79.
G C
Df
NOTE: If there is no taper, then effectively T=E

Table 14 – Minimum dimensions for straight relieved flanges (machined)

D* Df C T E G
Minimum
Radial Width of Bearing Minimum Minimum
Diameter of Outside
Surface Thickness of Thickness of (Recess)
Wheel Diameter of
Flange at Bore Flange O.D.
Flanges (1) Minimum Maximum
inches inches inches inches inches inches inches
1 3/8 1/16 1/8 1/16 1/16 1/16
2 11/16 1/8 3/16 3/32 3/32 1/16
3 1 3/16 3/16 3/32 3/32 1/16
4 1 3/8 3/16 3/16 1/8 1/8 1/16
5 1 11/16 1/4 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/16
6 2 3/8 1/2 3/16 3/16 1/16
7 2 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/16 3/16 1/16
8 2 11/16 3/8 1/2 3/16 3/16 1/16
10 3 3/8 3/8 5/8 1/4 1/4 1/16
12 4 1/2 5/8 5/16 5/16 1/16
14 4 11/16 1/2 3/4 5/16 5/16 1/16
16 5 3/8 1/2 1 5/16 5/16 1/16
18 6 5/8 1 3/8 3/8 1/16
20 6 11/16 5/8 1 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/16
22 7 3/8 5/8 1 1/4 7/16 7/16 1/16
24 8 5/8 1 1/4 7/16 7/16 1/16
26 8 11/16 5/8 1 1/4 1/2 1/2 1/16
28 9 3/8 3/4 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/16
30 10 3/4 1 1/2 5/8 5/8 1/16
36 12 7/8 2 3/4 3/4 1/16
42 14 7/8 2 3/4 3/4 1/16
48 16 1 1/8 2 1 1 1/16
60 20 1 1/4 2 1 1/8 1 1/8 1/16
72 24 1 3/8 2 1/2 1 1/4 1 1/4 1/16
*Flange for wheels under 2" may be unrelieved and shall be maintained flat and true.
(1)For exceptions to minimum outside diameter of flanges see section 5.1 and 5.1.1, pages 72 and 73.
Flange material: Steel, minimum tensile strength 60,000 psi
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording equal
or superior strength and rigidity are also acceptable.

81
ANSI B7.1-2000
J = Df – 2C (Min.)

T E

G C
Df
NOTE: If there is no taper, then effectively T=E

Figure 35 – Driving flange secured to spindle. See section 5.7, page 79.

Table 15 – Minimum dimensions for straight relieved flanges for reinforced

cutting-off wheels 81/4 inches in diameter or less used on portable saws
H Df C T E G
Major Diameter Minimum Minimum Minimum
Radial Width of
or Major Dimension* Outside Thickness Thickness of Recess
Bearing Surface
of Wheel Diameter of of Flange Flange at
Arbor Hole Flanges minimum maximum at Bore O.D.
inches inches inches inches inches inches inches
5/8 or smaller 1 1/8 1/4 1/2 1/8 1/16 1/16
Over 5/8 through 3/4 1 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/8 3/32 1/16
Over 3/4 through 1 1/4 1 3/4 1/4 1/2 5/32 1/8 1/16
*Without reduced bushings, see section 6.5, page 90.
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording
equal or superior strength and rigidity are also acceptable.

T
T

C
G
Df
Figure 36 – Stamped or Formed Steel Flanges for Bench Grinders

Table 16 – Minimum dimensions for straight relieved steel flanges stamped

or formed, used on bench grinders 3/4 horsepower or less
D Df C T G
Minimum Outside Minimum
Radial Width of
Diameter Diameter of Thickness Recess
Bearing Surface
of Wheel Flanges of Flange
minimum maximum
inches inches inches inches inches inches
4 1 3/8 1/8 3/16 0.067 1/32
4 1/2 1 1/2 3/16 1/4 0.067 1/32
5 1 11/16 3/16 1/4 0.067 1/32
6 2 1/4 1/2 0.093 1/32
7 2 3/8 1/4 1/2 0.123 1/16
8 2 11/16 1/4 1/2 0.123 1/16
Flange material: Steel, minimum tensile strength 60,000 psi
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions
affording equal or superior strength and rigidity are also acceptable.

82
 ANSI B7.1-2000

Table 17 – Minimum dimensions for straight

unrelieved flanges for wheels with threaded inserts
T D Df* T
Diameter of Minimum Outside Minimum Thickness
Df Wheel Diameter of Flange of Flange
inches inches inches
NOTE: T is effective thickness. 1 5/8 1/8
If there is no taper, then 2 1 1/8
this is overall thickness
3 1 3/16
4 1 3/8 3/16
Figure 37 – Driving flange secured to 5 1 3/4 1/4
spindle for use on portable wheels with 6 2 3/8
threaded inserts *NOTE: Must be large enough to extend beyond the bushing.
Where prong anchor or cupback bushings are used, this
footnote does not apply.
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the
conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording
equal or superior strength and rigidity are also acceptable.

Df
T is effective thickness
E T=E+F

C Figure 38 – Driving flange

F U secured to spindle. See
section 5.7, page 79.
H
C = Df – (H + 2U)
corner undercut, U = 1/8" min.

Table 18 – Minimum dimensions for adaptor flanges for organic bonded

snagging wheels over 11/4 inch thick up to and including 9500 SFPM
D H Df T E F (1) C
Minimum Minimum
Minimum Minimum (T-E)
Wheel Hole Thickness of Radial
Wheel Diameter Flange Thickness of Minimum
Diameter Flange at Edge Bearing
Diameter Flange at Bore Thickness
of Undercut Width
inches inches inches inches inches inches inches
3 1/2 or 4 6 7/8 3/8 1/2 5/8
12 through 14 5 7 7/8 3/8 1/2 5/8
6 8 7/8 3/8 1/2 5/8
4 6 7/8 3/8 1/2 5/8
5 7 7/8 3/8 1/2 5/8
Larger than 14
6 8 7/8 3/8 1/2 5/8
through 18
7 9 7/8 3/8 1/2 5/8
8 10 7/8 3/8 1/2 5/8
6 8 1 1/2 1/2 5/8
7 9 1 1/2 1/2 5/8
Larger than 18
8 10 1 1/2 1/2 5/8
through 24
10 12 1 1/2 1/2 5/8
12 14 1 1/2 1/2 5/8
Larger than 24
12 15 1 1/2 1/2 1 1/8
through 30
Larger than 30
12 15 1 3/8 7/8 1/2 1 1/8
through 36
(1) For wheels under 1 1/4 inch thick the sum of the F dimensions of the flange assembly shall not exceed 80% of the wheel thickness.
Flange material: Steel, minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording equal
or superior strength and rigidity are also acceptable.

83
ANSI B7.1-2000

Df Df
T is effective thickness T is effective thickness
E T=E+F E F T=E+F

F C C
U U

H H
C = Df – (H + 2U) C = Df – (H + 2U)
corner undercut, U = 1/8" min. corner undercut, U = 1/8" min.

Figure 39 – Adaptor Flange - Central Nut Figure 40 – Sleeve Adaptor Flange - Multiple
Mounting Screw Mounting
Driving flange secured to spindle. See section 5.7, Driving Flange secured to spindle. See sec-
page 79. tion 5.7, page 79.

Table 19 – Minimum dimensions for flanges for semi-automatic snagging grinders

at speeds over 9500 SFPM up to and including 16,500 SFPM
D H Df T E F (1)
Minimum
Minimum Minimum (T-E)
Wheel Wheel Hole Thickness of
Flange Thickness of Minimum Thickness
Diameter Diameter Flange at Edge
Diameter Flange at Bore Fixed Flange Only
of Undercut
inches inches inches inches inches inches
16 6 8 1 1/2 1/2
20 6 8 1 1/2 1/2
20 8 10 1 1/2 3/4 3/4
20 10 12 1 1/2 3/4 3/4
24 12 15 1 1/2 3/4 3/4
30 12 15 1 1/2 3/4 3/4
36 12 15 1 1/2 3/4 3/4
(1) For wheels under 1 3/4 inches thick the sum of the F dimensions of the flange assembly shall not exceed 80% of the wheel
thickness.
FLANGES shall be of steel, quality SAE 1040 or equivalent, annealed plate, heat treated to Rc 25-30.
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions
affording equal or superior strength and rigidity are also acceptable.

84
 ANSI B7.1-2000

Df
T is effective thickness
E T=E+F
Figure 41 – Driving flange
F C secured to spindle.
U
See section 5.7, page 79.
H
C = Df – (H + 2U)
corner undercut, U = 1/8" min.

Table 20 – Minimum dimensions for adaptor flanges for heavy duty organic
bonded snagging wheels used on swing frame grinders and high speed
floorstand and grinders over 9500 SFPM up to, and including, 16,500 SFPM

D H Df T E F (1)
Minimum
Minimum Minimum
Wheel Wheel Hole Thickness of (T-E)
Flange Thickness of
Diameter Diameter Flange at Edge Minimum Thickness
Diameter Flange at Bore
of Undercut
inches inches inches inches inches inches
20 6 8 1 1/2 1/2
20 8 10 1 1/2 1/2
20 10 12 1 1/2 1/2
24 12 15 1 1/2 1/2
30 12 15 1 1/2 1/2
36 12 15 1 1/2 1/2
(1) For wheels under 1 3/4 inches thick the sum of the F dimensions of the flange assembly shall not exceed 80% of the wheel
thickness.
FLANGES shall be of steel, quality SAE 1040 or equivalent, annealed plate, heat treated to Rc 25-30.
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions
affording equal or superior strength and rigidity are also acceptable.

85
ANSI B7.1-2000
Df Df
T is effective thickness T is effective thickness
E T=E+F E F T=E+F

F C C
U U

H H
C = Df – (H + 2U) C = Df – (H + 2U)
corner undercut, U = 1/8" min. corner undercut, U = 1/8" min.

Figure 42 – Adaptor flange - Central nut Figure 43 – Sleeve Adaptor Flange - Multiple
mounting Screw Mounting
Driving flange secured to spindle. See section 5.7, page 79. Driving flange secured to spindle. See section 5.7, page 79.

Table 21 – Minimum dimensions for flanges for precision grinding only

D H Df T E C
Minimum Minimum
Minimum Minimum
Wheel Hole Outside Thickness of
Wheel Diameter Thickness of Radial Bearing
Diameter Diameter of Flange at
Flange at Bore Width
Flange Undercut
Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches
3 5 1/2 7/16 5/8
8
5 7 1/2 7/16 5/8
3 5 1/2 7/16 5/8
Larger than 8 through 12 5 7 1/2 7/16 5/8
6 8 5/8 7/16 5/8
3 5 1/2 7/16 5/8
Larger than 12 through 14 5 7 1/2 7/16 5/8
6 8 5/8 7/16 5/8
5 7 5/8 7/16 5/8
6 8 5/8 7/16 5/8
8 10 5/8 7/16 5/8
Larger than 14 through 18
9 11 5/8 7/16 5/8
10 11 1/2 5/8 7/16 3/8
12 13 1/2 5/8 7/16 3/8
8 10 5/8 7/16 5/8
Larger than 18 through 22 10 11 1/2 5/8 7/16 5/8
12 13 1/2 5/8 7/16 5/8
8 10 3/4 1/2 5/8
10 11 3/4 3/4 1/2 5/8
Larger than 22 through 26 12 13 3/4 3/4 1/2 5/8
15 16 3/4 3/4 1/2 5/8
16 17 3/4 3/4 1/2 5/8
8 10 3/4 1/2 5/8
10 12 3/4 1/2 5/8
Larger than 26 through 30 12 14 3/4 1/2 5/8
15 17 3/4 1/2 5/8
16 18 3/4 1/2 5/8
12 14 1/4 3/4 1/2 3/4
15 17 1/4 3/4 1/2 3/4
Larger than 30 through 42 16 18 1/4 3/4 1/2 3/4
18 20 1/4 3/4 1/2 3/4
20 22 1/4 3/4 1/2 3/4
16 20 1 3/4 1 5/8
Larger than 42 through 60 20 24 1 3/4 1 5/8
24 29 1 1/8 7/8 2 1/8
NOTE: FLANGES shall be of steel, quality 1040 or equivalent, annealed plate, heat treated to Rc 25-30.
The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or
dimensions affording equal or superior strength and rigidity are also acceptable.
For hole sizes smaller than shown in this table, use table 14.

86

6 Mounting
6.1 Inspection
Prior to mounting, all wheels shall be in-
spected for damage and cracks.
Wheels which show any evidence of cracks,
abusive handling or abusive storage shall
not be mounted.
6.1.1 Inspection methods
The user shall visually inspect each abra-
sive wheel and should apply an additional
crack detection test when a suitable test is
available.
6.1.1.1 Visual inspection
All wheels shall be carefully inspected visu-
ally to make sure that they have not been
damaged in transit, handling, storage or from
other causes.
6.1.1.2 Ring test
The ring test depends on the damping char-
acteristics of a cracked wheel to alter the
sound emitted when the wheel is tapped
lightly. It is subject to interpretation by the
inspector and is primarily applicable to vitri-
fied bonded wheels. To perform the ring
test, wheels should be tapped gently with a
light nonmetallic implement, such as the
handle of a screw driver for light wheels, or
a wooden mallet for heavier wheels.
Tap wheels about 45° each side of the ver-
tical center line and about 1" or 2" from the
periphery as indicated by the spots in fig-
ures 44 and 45. Rotate the wheel 45° and
repeat the test.
ANSI B7.1-2000
Explanatory Information
(NOT PART OF ANSI STANDARD)
E 6.1 Inspection
Defective grinding wheels are unsafe and
must not be mounted. A damaged or cracked
wheel might disintegrate while in operation
which could result in personal injury.
If any evidence of cracks or other damage is
found, the wheel should be destroyed or the
information should be reported to the manu-
facturer and arrangements made for inspec-
tion.
E 6.1.1 Inspection methods
Defects such as broken wheels, chips, and
gouges can be detected visually.
Cracks in abrasive wheels are frequently not
visible to the naked eye. Effective test meth-
ods have been developed to detect cracks
which are not detected by visual inspection.
Two of these methods are the ring test and
the vibration test.
E 6.1.1.2 Ring test
If the wheel is not too heavy, it may be
suspended from the hole on a small pin or
finger. (See illustration 69.) Heavier wheels
may be allowed to rest in a vertical position
on a clean hard floor.
Illustration 69
87
ANSI B7.1-2000
Tap the wheel gently with a nonmetallic
implement such as a wooden screw driver
handle for light wheels and a wooden mallet
for heavy wheels. The best spot to tap a
wheel for the ring test is about 45 degrees
either side of the vertical center line and
about 1 or 2" from the periphery. (See fig-
ures 44 and 45.)
If struck directly along the vertical center
line, the ring, even in a sound wheel, is
sometimes muffled and may give the errone-
ous impression that the wheel is cracked.
This is especially true with large wheels which
are supported on the floor when conducting
this test. (See figure 45.) Also, it is some-
times noticeable when the wheel is sus-
pended from the hole. It is recommended
Figure 44 Figure 45 that the test be repeated after rotating the
wheel 45 degrees to the right or left.

Large, thick wheels may be given the ring
test by striking the wheel on the periphery
rather than the side of the wheel.
A sound and undamaged wheel will give a
clear tone. If cracked, there will be a dead
sound and not a clear ring and the wheel
shall not be used.
Apply this ring test immediately before mount-
ing either a new or used wheel on a ma-
chine. Comparison of the sound with other
wheels of the same lot and specification will
allow rejection of any wheel with a suspi-
ciously different ring.

Limitation:
Wheels must be dry and free of sawdust
when applying the ring test, otherwise the
sound may be deadened.
The ring test is not applicable to certain
wheels because of their shape or size.
Examples are:

1. small wheels (4" diameter and smaller);

2. plugs and cones;

3. mounted wheels;

4. segments;

5. plate-mounted wheels;

6. inserted nut and projecting stud disc

wheels.

88
 ANSI B7.1-2000
6.1.1.3 Vibration test E 6.1.1.3 Vibration test
The vibration test is based on the way that The vibration test can be used either in lieu
loose sand or similar material is distributed of or in conjunction with the ring test. The
on the side of a wheel when the wheel is test is applicable to all bond types and is not
vibrating. impaired by ambient noise.
To perform the vibration test, an abrasive Perform the vibration test before mounting
wheel is set on a test fixture in the horizontal either a new or used wheel on a machine.
position and coated with a thin layer of fine,
dry sand. The wheel is vibrated gently. As
the wheel vibrates, the sand granules re-
spond to the vibration energy. If the wheel is
cracked, the granules move away from the
crack; if the wheel is sound, the granules will
continue to be uniformly distributed over the
entire surface of the wheel.
The test should be conducted on both sides
of the wheel.
6.1.2 Metal centered wheels
Steel center abrasive cutting-off and dia-
mond cutting-off wheels with cracks in the
metal center shall not be used.
6.2 Spindle speed E 6.2 Spindle speed
It shall be determined at time of mounting
that spindle speed does not exceed the maxi-
mum operating speed marked on the wheel
or wheel package. Spindle speed shall be
measured at free running speed of the ma-
chine. When a partly used wheel is re-
mounted, spindle speed in revolutions per
minute may exceed the maximum revolu-
tions per minute marked on the wheel pro-
vided the maximum peripheral speed (sur-
face feet per minute), established for the
wheel when new, is not exceeded. (See sec-
tions 1.2.72, page 8, 1.2.88, page 10, and
1.2.97, page 11, for explanations and calcu-
lation of peripheral speed from revolutions
per minute. Also, wheel speed conversion
table on page 10 may be helpful.)

Illustration 70 – Free running speed of spindle

being measured with a tachometer

89
ANSI B7.1-2000
6.2.1 Tension speed
It shall be determined at time of mounting a
steel centered diamond cutting-off wheel that
spindle speed is within +10%/-20% of the
tensioned speed marked on the wheel.
6.3 Arbor hole size
Abrasive wheels shall fit freely on the spindle
and maintain proper clearance under all
grinding conditions.
A controlled clearance between the wheel
arbor hole and the machine spindle (or wheel
sleeve or adaptor) is essential to avoid ex-
cessive pressure from mounting and spindle
expansion. Therefore, wheel arbor hole size
equal to or exceeding the dimension shown
in table 22, page 92, and spindle dimen-
sions shall meet requirements of section 3.3,
page 32.
Tolerance for the arbor hole for steel-cen-
tered diamond cutting-off wheels should be
+.002/-.000" to the minimum size given in
table 22, page 92.
6.4 Surface condition
All surfaces between the wheel, blotters and
flanges that come in contact with each other
during mounting shall be flat and free of
foreign particles.
6.5 Reducing bushings
Reducing bushings shall be specifically de-
signed, properly manufactured and fitted when
used in abrasive wheels. The bushing shall fit
freely on the spindle and maintain proper clear-
ance under all conditions. Minimum machine
spindle size as shown in table 1, page 34,
should not be violated. Reducing bushings
shall not be used to mount a larger abrasive
wheel on a grinder than those for which the
grinder was designed.
90
E 6.2.1 Tension speed
If the cutting-off wheel is operated at a speed
substantially different from the speed it was
tensioned for, it will not run true, i.e., it may
wobble or flutter. Therefore, the user must
operate within the recommended speed
range. Failure to do so could cause damage
to or failure of the wheel's steel center, lead-
ing to serious personal injury.
E 6.3 Arbor hole size
The machine spindle or adaptor size must be
maintained by the user. Worn or undersize
spindles or adaptors can cause an out-of-
balance condition, contributing to wheel fail-
ure.
E 6.4 Surface condition
Flanges can be distorted by excessive tight-
ening or burred by dropping and must be
inspected each time a wheel is mounted.
(See section 5.8, page 80.) Inspection for
foreign particles should be made on wheels,
blotters and flanges.
Presence of foreign particles in these areas
can result in uneven mounting pressure
against the sides of the wheel causing
stresses that can lead to wheel failure.
E 6.5 Reducing bushings
If a reducing bushing is wider than the wheel
in which it is used, it will interfere with proper
tightening of the flanges against the wheel.
The power required to drive a grinding wheel
is transferred through the flanges. If this
power is partially or completely transferred
through the reducing bushing, wheel failure
may result.
 ANSI B7.1-2000
When a reducing bushing is used in the Only an appropriate reducing bushing may
wheel arbor hole, it shall not exceed the be used to compensate for an oversize arbor
width of the wheel and shall not contact the hole, and substitutes, such as flat shim stock,
flanges. Loose reducing bushings (not me- must not be used.
chanically held) should not be used with
wheels less than 1 / 8 " in thickness.
Separate reducing bushings, unless supplied
or recommended by the abrasive wheel
manufacturer, shall not be used to adapt
larger hole abrasive wheels to portable, hand
held tools.
6.6 Blotters
See section 5.6, page 78.
6.7 Flanges
See section 5.1, page 72.
6.7.1 Uniformity of diameter
See section 5.4, page 77.
6.8 Tightening of mounting nut and
screws
6.8.1 Single end nut E 6.8.1 Single end nut
The spindle end nut shall be tightened only Overtightening of the spindle end nut may
enough to drive the wheel and prevent slip- spring the flange. A sprung flange can cause
page. stress concentrations which may break the
wheel. Under-tightening of the spindle end
nut can permit wheel slippage which may
result in breakage.
The means and procedure recommended by
the machine building for tightening the
spindle end nut should always be followed.

Illustration 71 – The above clearly illustrates

the results encountered when the spindle end
nut is excessively tightened

91
92
Table 22 – Minimum arbor hole sizes in inches
ANSI B7.1-2000

NOMINAL ARBOR HOLE DIAMETER

3/16" &
WHEEL END USE Under 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 7/8" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 1 3/4" 2 2 3/8" 2 1/2" 3" 3 3/8" 3 1/2" 4" 5" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 20" 24"

CUTTING-OFF +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.004 +.006

CYLINDRICAL +.002 +.002 +.003 +.003 +.004 +.005

Between Centers

CYLINDRICAL +.002 +.003 +.003 +.004

Centerless

CYLINDRICAL +.002 +.002 +.002

Centerless Regulating

INTERNAL +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001

OFF HAND +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.002 +.005 +.005

SAW GUMMING +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001

SNAGGING +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001

Floor Stand (VIT)

SNAGGING +.006 +.006 +.006 +.007

Floor Stand (Organic)

SNAGGING +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001

Portable

SNAGGING +.010 +.010 +.010

Mechanical

SNAGGING +.004 +.004 +.004 +.004 +.006 +.006 +.006 +.007

Swing Frame

SURFACE GRINDING +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.002 +.002 +.002 +.002 +.003 +.003 +.004
Horizontal

TOOL GRINDING +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.001 +.002 +.002

DIAMOND and CBN +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005 +.0005

6.8.2 Multiple screws
Multiple screw flanges shall be tightened
uniformly to prevent springing of the flanges
and to ensure even distribution of mounting
pressure over entire surface of the flanges.
Flange screws shall be tightened in a criss-
cross sequence similar to that illustrated in
figure 46. Figure 46 illustrates only 6 and 8
screw flanges but a similar sequence can be
devised for any number of screws.
Torque wrenches should be used to tighten
screws on multiple screw flanges. Applied
torque should not exceed 20 foot pounds
unless greater torque is recommend or ap-
proved by the machine builder.
Screws shall be clean and free running.
Screws shall be of such length as to ensure
proper clamping of the wheel by the flanges.
1
1 6
5 8
3 4 3 4
5 2
7
2 pendent on flange design and material. Since
Order of Tightening Order of Tightening
1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8
Figure 46 – Sequence of tightening
screws on multiple screw flanges
6.9 Direction and length of thread on
machine spindle
See sections 3.3.4 and 3.4.1, page 33.
6.10 Threaded hole wheels
Special consideration must be given to
threaded hole wheels of the following types:
6, 11, 16, 17, 18, 18R and 19.
ANSI B7.1-2000
E 6.8.2 Multiple screws
The gradual tightening of screws on multiple
screw type flanges by use of a torque wrench
is recommended. The tightening should pro-
ceed from one screw to one diametrically
opposite and then in a crisscross manner
until sufficient pressure is applied uniformly
to prevent slippage. Care must be taken to
avoid excessive tightening as it may cause
springing of the flanges resulting in wheel
breakage. Excessive tightening is particu-
larly dangerous if flange screws are tight-
ened when the wheel mount is at operating
temperature and then allowed to cool. Spindle
contraction during cooling may increase
flange pressure. If the resulting pressure is
excessive, it will spring the flange resulting
in stresses which may break the wheel. The
use of impact wrenches to tighten the flange
screws on sleeve adaptor flanges is not rec-
ommended. This method will cause the first
screw to have excessive torque and then
every remaining screw likewise. It is an un-
safe method to tighten multiple screws.
6 Maximum permissible applied torque is de-
flange properties are determined by the ma-
chine builder, his recommendations as to
maximum applied torque must be followed.
Applied torque of 15 to 20 foot pounds is
common with single wheel mounting, how-
ever, some exceptionally severe operations
require greater torque.
Screws must be free of foreign material and
threads of screws and tapped holes must be
in good condition. Otherwise, equal torque
applied on all screws will not provide uni-
form clamping force. If clean screws are not
free running, they must be replaced and/or
holes retapped to provide adequate threads.
If flange screws are too long, they may bot-
tom in tapped holes resulting in a loosely
clamped wheel. If screws are too long, they
must be replaced with screws of correct
length.
E 6.10 Threaded hole wheels
When threaded hole wheels are used, as in
cups, cones and plugs, the size and mass of
threaded hole wheels must be kept within
93
ANSI B7.1-2000
The direction of the thread shall be such that limits which have been found safe by expe-
to remove the wheel it must be turned in the rience for this mounting procedure.
same direction it rotates when in use.
With this type of mounting, a relieved back
The length of the spindle shall be such that flange must not be used. If made with a
it shall not bottom in blind threaded hole relief, it can pull the busing out of the wheel.
type wheels. See illustration 72.
Spacers shall not be used between threaded
hole wheels and back flanges.
Threaded hole wheel mounting should not
be used with wheels larger than 6" diameter.
Threads in threaded hole wheels should be
of class 2B and should be relieved on the
side fitting against the flange so as to allow
the wheel to be screwed firmly and flat
against the back flange.

Illustration 72 – Mounting
of threaded hole wheels

6.11 Mounting of abrasive discs (inserted E 6.11 Mounting of abrasive discs (in-
nut, inserted washer and projecting stud serted nut, inserted washer and project-
type) ing stud type)
Machine face plate (steel disc wheel) and
mounting surface of the wheel shall be flat
and free of foreign particles.
For other requirements for mounting abra-
sive discs see section 3.9, page 39.

6.12 Mounting of plate mounted type

wheels
Machine face plate (steel disc wheel) and
mounting surface of the wheel shall be flat
and free of foreign particles.
For other requirements for mounting plate
mounted type wheels see section 3.10,
page 41. Illustration 73 – An inserted nut type
abrasive disc showing proper mounting

94
 ANSI B7.1-2000
6.13 Safety guards E 6.13 Safety guards
At the completion of wheel mounting and
prior to starting the wheel, the safety guard
shall be secured in place. The safety guard
shall be inspected for condition and adjust-
ment. All safety guard fasteners shall be in
place and properly tightened. (See section
4.1, page 50, for full information and excep-
tion.)

Illustration 74 – A band-type guard used with

Type 11 cup wheel

6.14 Mounted wheels E 6.14 Mounted wheels

Machine speed shall be set and measured to
make certain that it does not exceed the
maximum operating speed for the mounted
wheel as used.
(See table 23, page 99 and tables 26
through 34, pages 121-136, for explanation.)
Since the overhang "O" of the mandrel of a
mounted wheel is a factor in determining the
maximum allowable operating speed, care
should be taken to assure that the overhang
conforms to the limitations shown in sec-
tion 10, page 117.

6.14.1 Mounted wheels on portable air

grinders
The wheel mandrel shall be inserted to the
full depth of the gripping jaws of the grinder
collet. (See section 10, page 117.)

Illustration 75 – Dimension "O" indicates

overhang of the mandrel

95
ANSI B7.1-2000
6.15 Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels
Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels shall be mounted
with adaptors or flanges as specified in sec-
tions 5.1.2.2 and 5.1.2.3. The specially de-
signed adaptors described in section 5.1.2.2
shall be used to mount only Types 27, 28
and 29 reinforced organic bonded wheels.
Flanges and adaptors shall be checked for
flatness of bearing surface. Sprung or warped
flanges or adaptors shall not be used.
Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by its
manufacturer shall not be reused.
At the completion of mounting, a safety guard
shall be in place between the wheel and the
operator position. (See section 4.2.2.3 and
figure 13, page 53.)
6.16 Type 27A wheels
See section 5.1.2.1, page 74.
6.17 Type 2 cylinder wheels
Type 2 cylinder wheels have diameter, wheel
thickness and rim thickness dimensions.
Grinding is performed on the rim surface.
The wheel is chucked or cemented directly
to the machine face plate which is securely
attached to the machine spindle. The ma-
chine face plate shall be flat, concentric and
at a 90° angle as mounted to the machine
spindle. Cylinder wheels shall be used only
on machines equipped with band type safety
guards that conform to general specifica-
tions outlined in section 4.3.14, page 66.
Minimum thickness of machine face plate is
the same as that shown for disc wheels in
table 2, page 39.
6.18 Segments
Segments individually chucked in suitable
holding mechanisms to form a grinding unit
shall be mounted in a manner prescribed by
the manufacturer of the chucking device.
The safety guard should conform to that
used for cylinder wheels. (See section 6.17
and specifications outlined in section 4.3.14,
page 66.)
96
E 6.15 Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels
Types 27, 28 and 29 wheels are designed for
use on right angle head or vertical spindle
portable grinders. Type 27 wheels with flat
outer area are suited for notching and cut-
ting operations as well as flat area grinding.
Type 28 wheels with a saucer-shaped outer
area are suited for corner cleaning work and
must not be used for notching and cutting
operations. The variance in diameter be-
tween the back flange and the adaptor nut
and use of side pressure in wheel operation
limit the use of this mounting to reinforced
organic bonded wheels.
It is important when mounting Types 27, 28
and 29 wheels that proper contact is made
between the wheel and the back flange.
Flanges must be checked for flatness since
a warped or sprung flange will cause vibra-
tion and possible wheel failure.
When these wheels are supplied with a throw-
away type mount attached by the manufac-
turer, the mount must not be reused.
E 6.17 Type 2 cylinder wheels
Illustration 76 – Examples
of Type 2 cylinder wheels
E 6.18 Segments
Some shapes are designed to be chucked at
one end for the entire segment life. These
tend to flare outward due to centrifugal force
if improperly mounted. To prevent this, it is
recommended that two retaining bands be
used with these segments during operations.
As the segments wear, each band should be
removed to avoid interference with the work.
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Newly mounted segments used in chucks
which are not designed to downfeed through
the chucking device should be securely
mounted with two equally spaced retaining
bands. See illustration 78.

Illustration 77 – A segmental wheel assembly

Illustration 78

97
ANSI B7.1-2000
7 Standard speeds
7.1 Standard speeds
7.1.1 Standard maximum speeds
The maximum operating speed of each wheel
shall be established by the wheel manufac-
turer. Table 23, indicates maximum surface
feet per minute (SFPM) for various classes
of wheels. (See section 1) The use classifi-
cation in table 23 takes precedence over the
general wheel type.
The number of revolutions per minute (RPM)
may be increased as the diameter of a wheel
is reduced through wear, provided the origi-
nal surface feet per minute (SFPM) is never
exceeded. (Section 10, table 35 will be help-
ful in converting RPM to SFPM, also see
section 1.2.88, page 10.) It shall be the
user’s responsibility not to exceed these
maximum operating speeds. Spindle speed
shall be measured at free running speed of
the machine.
7.1.2 Machine supplier's responsibility
It shall be the responsibility of the machine
supplier (e.g. manufacturer, reconstructor,
modifier, installer and integrator) to design
and construct those machine components
concerned with the proper and safe opera-
tion of the grinding or cutting-off wheels for
the speed and the type of operation for which
the machine is intended. Particular attention
shall be given to the design of the wheel
safety guards, wheel flanges and wheel
mounting spindle.
7.1.3 Wheel user's responsibility
All abrasive wheels shall be used in con-
formance with instructions given in the fol-
lowing sections and shall be handled, stored
and inspected in accordance with section 2,
page 27, and section 6.1, page 87.
a. Section 1 — Definitions;
b. Section 3 — General machine conditions;
c. Section 4 — Safety guards;
d. Section 5 — Flanges;
e. Section 6 — Mounting;
98
Explanatory Information
(NOT PART OF ANSI STANDARD)
E 7.1.1 Standard maximum speeds
The maximum operating speeds established
in table 23, have proven satisfactory for the
wheels as classified. The maximum operat-
ing speed as determined by the manufac-
turer is dependent on the wheel shape and
strength. It is the responsibility of the wheel
user to make sure that under no condition is
a wheel to be operated faster than the maxi-
mum surface feet per minute established by
the wheel manufacturer.
The maximum surface feet per minute
(SFPM) can be determined by converting the
maximum revolutions per minute (RPM) for
the full size wheel to SFPM from the conver-
sion table, table 35. The maximum operating
speed is not necessarily the most efficient
grinding speed. Better results are frequently
obtained at lower than maximum operating
speeds.
E 7.1.2 Machine supplier's responsibility
The machine supplier (e.g. manufacturer,
reconstructor, modifier, installer and inte-
grator) should decide upon the fitness of the
machine for the proposed operation. If it
becomes necessary or desirable to convert,
change or alter the machine from the design
or purpose for which it was originally made,
it is important that the components involved
with the use of the abrasive wheel be de-
signed in accordance with the appropriate
sections of this standard.
E 7.1.3 Wheel user's responsibility
The repeated references to other applicable
Sections and Regulations are important. All
users of abrasive wheels should be familiar
with these sections. Their proper application
has a direct relationship to the safe use of
abrasive wheels.
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 23 – Standard maximum speeds in surface feet per minute
Classi- Inorganic Bonds Organic Bonds
fication Types of Wheels Low Medium High Low Medium High
Number (See Section 1 for Definitions) Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed
Type 1 Straight Wheels — except classifications 6, 9, OPERATING SPEED SHALL NOT EXCEED (SFPM):
11, 12, 13 and 14 below
1
Types 5 and 7 Recessed Wheels 5,500 6,500 8,500 6,500 8,000 9,500
Type 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26
Type 4* Taper Side Wheels
Dovetailed*
Type 12 Dish Wheels 5,500 6,000 6,500 6,500 8,000 9,500
2
Type 13 Saucer Wheels
Types 16, 17, 18 19 Cones & Plugs
Type 2 Cylinder Wheel 5,000 5,500 6,000 5,000 6,000 7,000
Cup Shape Tool Grinding Wheels
3 Type 6 Straight Side Cups 4,500 5,000 6,000 6,000 7,500 8,500
Type 11 Flaring Cups
Cup Shape Snagging Wheels
(For Portable Machines)
4 4,500 5,500 6,500 6,000 8,000 9,500
Type 6 Straight Sided Cup
Type 11 Flaring/Taper Cup
Abrasive Discs: Plate Mounted
5 Inserted Nut and Projecting Stud: Solid or Segmental 5,500 6,000 6,500 5,500 7,000 8,500
Type 2, Inserted Nut, Snagging type Cylinder Wheels
Reinforced Wheels Type 1:
Max Dia 4", Max Thickness 3/16" X X X X X 20,000
Max Dia 4", Max Thickness 1/4" X X X 9,500 12,500 16,000
Max Dia 10", Max Thickness 1/2" X X X 9,500 12,500 14,200
All Other Diameters & Thicknesses X X X 9,500 12,500 14,200
6
Reinforced Wheels – Types 27, 28 & 29
Max Dia 9"
Max Thickness 1/4" X X X 9,500 12,500 16,000
Max Thickness 3/8" X X X 9,500 12,500 14,200
Max Dia 9" – Over 3/8" Thick X X X 9,500 9,500 11,000
Type 1 Wheels for Bench and Pedestal Grinders and
Types 1, 5 and 7 for Surface Grinders in the
following sizes only
7
7" dia. up to 2" thick and up to 2" hole 5,500 6,325 6,600 6,500 8,000 9,500
8" dia. up to 2" thick and up to 2" hole 5,500 6,325 7,550 6,500 8,000 9,500
14" dia. up to 3" thick and up to 5" hole 5,500 6,000 6,600 6,500 8,000 9,500
8 Diamond and Cubic Boron Nitride — see table 24, page 100
Cutting-Off Wheels
Type 1 Reinforced Organic
9
Max Dia 4", Max Thickness 1/8" X X X 14,200 16,000 20,000
Max Dia 16", incl. Type 27A, Reinforced Organic X X X 9,500 12,000 16,000
Cutting-Off Wheels, Type 1 and 27A,
10 X X X 9,500 12,000 14,200
Larger than 16", including Reinforced Organic
11 Thread and Flute Grinding Wheels 8,000 10,000 12,000 10,000 12,000 16,000
12 Crankshaft and Camshaft Grinding Wheels 5,500 8,000 8,500 6,500 8,000 9,500
Type 1 Snagging Wheels 16" diameter and
larger, Organic bond including reinforced:
Used on swing frame grinders,
13
designed for this speed X X X X X 12,500
Used on semi-automatic snagging
grinders, designed for this speed X X X X X 16,500
Internal Wheels – Type 1 and 5
14
Maximum diameter 6" 5,500 8,000 8,500 6,500 8,500 9,500
15 Mounted Wheels (See section 10 for limitations) X X 10,000 X X 10,000
*Non-standard Shape.
Note: For converting surface feet per minute (SFPM) to revolutions per minute (RPM) see conversion table 35.
See section 3, page 31—General Machine Conditions; section 4, page 50 — Safety Guards; section 5, page 72 — Flanges.
Table 23 explanatory
Abrasive wheels are produced in a wide range of specifications to perform satisfactorily in a wide range of
grinding applications. As a general rule, hard material requires a soft grade wheel and soft material is best ground
by a hard grade wheel. Different wheel grades have different strengths; harder grade wheels are generally stronger
than softer grade wheels, although other ingredients such as grit size, structure and bond type play a part in the
overall strength of an abrasive wheel specification.
Therefore, the maximum allowable operating speeds vary depending on the strength of the wheel. It is for this
reason that speeds shown in table 23 are listed in columns labeled Low, Medium and High Speed.

99
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 24 – Standard maximum speeds in surface feet per minute.
Diamond and cubic boron nitride.
Bond Type (Rim Material)
Single Layered
Wheel Body (Core) Resin Vitrified Metal
Plated/Brazed
1. Metal (Includes PM) 16,000 16,000 16,000 *
2. Resin 9,500 9,500 9,500 *
3. Vitrified * * * *
4. Solid Steel (Not PM) 16,000 16,000 16,000 25,000
PM = Powdered Metallurgy
All speeds are listed in surface feet per minute (SFPM)
(*) Non-standard product, no data available, must be speed tested.

f. Section 7 — Speeds;
g. Section 9 — General operating rules.
Abrasive wheels used at speeds higher than
those shown in table 23, page 99, shall be
subject to the additional requirements out-
lined in section 8, page 105, Special speeds.
7.1.4 Wheel manufacturer's responsibility
7.1.4.1 Speed testing of wheels
7.1.4.1A Vitrified bonded wheels
E 7.1.4.1 Speed testing of wheels
It shall be the wheel manufacturer's respon-
sibility to speed test each and every vitrified The test speed subjects an abrasive wheel
bonded wheel to be operated at standard to significantly greater forces than does the
speeds as listed in table 23, page 99, in safe maximum operating speed. This test
accordance with table 25, page 101. establishes an adequate factor of safety pro-
vided the wheels are used in accordance
Exceptions: Wheels that need not be speed with safe practices outlined in this Standard
tested are: and have not been altered, damaged or
a. wheels less than 6" diameter; abused after speed testing.
b. ball grinding wheels; The speed test does not justify operation of
c. segments; the wheel at higher than the maximum oper-
ating speed established by the wheel manu-
d. segmental disc wheels and disc wheels
facturer. The maximum speed must never be
which are not plate mounted;
exceeded because the safety factor estab-
e. mounted wheels; lished by the speed test covers other normal
f. other wheels for operation at 2,500 SFPM grinding stresses.
or less.
A manufacturer may subject the vitrified
bonded wheel specification to ANSI B74.21,
Fatigue Proof Test Procedure for Vitrified
Grinding Wheels. This procedure outlines a
method to calculate a speed test necessary
to assure against premature failure due to
fatigue. The calculated speed test is a func-
tion of the maximum operating speed, the
useful lifetime of the wheel and the suscep-
tibility of the wheel to fatigue. The speed
test factor calculated using this procedure

100
 ANSI B7.1-2000
may be used instead of the value of 1.5
specified in table 25, page 101. If the speed
test factor calculated is less than 1.2, then a
value of no less than 1.2 shall be used.
7.1.4.1B Organic bonded wheels
If shall be the wheel manufacturer's respon-
sibility to speed test each and every wheel to
be operated within the standard speeds as
listed in table 23, page 99, in accordance
with table 25.
Exceptions: Wheels that need not be speed
tested are:
a. wheels less than 6" diameter;
b. ball grinding wheels;
c. segments;
d. segmental disc wheels and disc wheels
which are not plate mounted;
e. regulating wheels (for centerless type
grinders);
f. mounted wheels;
g. other wheels for operation at 2,500 SFPM
or less.
7.1.4.1C Superabrasive wheels
It shall be the wheel manufacturers respon-
sibility to speed test each and every wheel
designed to be operated at standard speeds
as listed in table 24, at a speed in accor-
dance with table 25.

Table 25 – Wheel manufacturers testing speeds

Operating Speed
Class of Wheel Minimum Test Factor*
Surface Feet Per Minute

Cutting-off Wheels All Speeds 1.20

All Bonds and Wheel Types

Up to and including 5,000 1.25
(Except Cutting-off Wheels)

All Bonds and Wheel Types

Faster than 5,000 1.50
(Except Cutting-off Wheels)

Alternate Test for Vitrified Bonded Refer to ANSI B74.21 Fatigue

Faster than 5,000
Type 1 Wheels Only Proof Test Procedure**

Superabrasive Wheel Segment

All Speeds 1.50
Cemented to Dissimilar Bodies

*Actual operating speed shall be multiplied by this test factor to establish the minimum speed at which
wheels shall be tested by the wheel manufacturer, except for those wheels rated at less than 5,000 SFPM,
the operating speed equivalent to 5,000 SFPM shall be used.
**Use the ratio calculated by this procedure, but not less than 1.2.

101
ANSI B7.1-2000
Exceptions: Wheels that need not be speed
tested are:
a. wheels less than 4" diameter;
b. segments;
c. segmental disc wheels and disc wheels
which are not plate mounted;
d. mounted wheels;
e. steel centered 1A1RSS metal bond seg-
mented saws (i.e., stone and concrete saws);
f. steel centered single abrasive layer metal
bond products (i.e., brazed or plated);
g. monolithic (diamond or CBN to the hole)
metal and resin bonded wheels in diameters
to 7";
h. wheels for operation at 2,500 surface
feet per minute or less;
i. vitrified, resin and metal bonded wheels
with steel or aluminum cores in all diam-
eters.
7.1.4.2 Speed marking E 7.1.4.2 Speed marking
An abrasive wheel or its package shall show In the case of mounted wheels, because of
the maximum operating speed as revolu- the overhang factor (see figure 47, page 118)
tions per minute (RPM). which is established by the user at the time
of mounting, it is impossible for the wheel
Exception:
manufacturer to indicate maximum operating
Mounted wheels (see definition, paragraph speed. Therefore the user must determine
1.4.19, page 25) and their package need not from the speed tables in Section 10 the
show maximum operating speed. maximum operating speed (RPM) for any
mounted wheel as used.
7.1.4.3 Blade tensioning E 7.1.4.3 Blade tensioning
Steel-centered diamond cutting-off wheels Blade tensioning uses various means to neu-
must be tensioned for the speed they are tralize the residual stresses so that the wheel
intended to be operated at, tested at that will run true at the speed at which it is
speed, and marked as such. intended to be operated. The wheel is
tensioned and tested at this speed by the
Exception:
manufacturer. This is less than the maximum
Cutting-off wheels 18" or less in diameter speed allowed (16,000 SFPM) as these lower
which are marked to be operated at RPM's speeds (8,000 to 12,000 SFPM) have been
equal to or less than 12,000 SFPM. Cutting- found to provide optimum diamond cutting
off wheels operated at higher speeds (such action and most economical operation. The
as high-speed dry diamond cutting-off operating speed is stamped, etched or
wheels) must be tensioned and tested at marked onto the core.
their appropriate speeds.
7.1.4.4 Segment attachment testing E 7.1.4.4 Segment attachment testing
Each diamond segment welded, brazed or This test determines the adequacy of the
soldered to a steel centered cutting-off wheel weld, braze or solder joint to help ensure
shall undergo a test to determine that the that the diamond segment does not come
segment is adequately affixed to the steel loose from the steel center during proper
center. utilization of the wheel. The test can be a
bending load applied by a torque device,

102

7.2 Speed check of machines — User's
responsibility
The user shall establish a program to ensure
that grinding machines do not subject abra-
sive wheels to speeds greater than the maxi-
mum operating speeds marked on the wheel
or package. In the case of variable speed
machines the number of revolutions per
minute (RPM) may be increased as the di-
ameter of a wheel is reduced through wear,
provided the original surface feet per minute
(SFPM) is never exceeded. (The speed table
in section 10, table 35, will be helpful in
converting RPM to SFPM, also see section
1.2.88, page 10.) It shall be the user's re-
sponsibility not to exceed these maximum
operating speeds. Spindle speed shall be
measured at free running speed of the ma-
chine.
ANSI B7.1-2000
impact device or other method; or it can be
a tension load device. The actual load or test
applied is determined by the manufacturer
depending on segment attachment method
and wheel design.
E 7.2 Speed check of machines — User’s
responsibility
It is of special importance that portable air
grinders should be checked to be sure that
proper air pressure is maintained and that
the machine governor mechanism is clean,
in good operating condition, and functioning
properly. This reference to air grinders is not
intended to overlook the necessity for a regu-
lar check of the speed of the wheel spindles
on all types of grinding machines. The user
should assign this responsibility to compe-
tent personnel using equipment properly
designed for speed check purposes such as
a tachometer or stroboscope. The user
should also keep a permanent record of such
speed checks.
A tachometer is suitable for use on the ma-
jority of machines to check the spindle speed
(RPM). From a safety standpoint this ta-
chometer check should be made without the
grinding wheel, loose flange, or nut mounted
on the spindle.

Illustration 79 – Recommended frequency of speed measurement for various machine types.

Measure Speeds at Time of Installation of All Machines.
PORTABLE GRINDERS
1. Air Driven
2. Electric Driven (Hi-Cycle)
ALL OTHER GRINDERS
1. Direct Drive (Single Speed)
2. Belt Driven (Single Speed)
3. Variable Speed Machines
Measure the speed of governor controlled grinders every 20 hours of actual use or
once per week, whichever comes first.
Measure speed of all types of grinders after maintenance or repair, whenever a
grinder is issued from the tool crib and at each wheel change. Several readings
should be taken.
Measure monthly and after any maintenance or repair that could affect the speed
of the machine.
Measure after any maintenance or repair that could affect the speed of the
machine.
Measure monthly and after any maintenance or repair that could affect the speed
of the machine.
Measure once per week and after any maintenance or repair that could affect the
speed of the machine. On variable speed machines, other than semi-automatic
snagging grinders, measure speed whenever a wheel change is made.

103
ANSI B7.1-2000
7.3 Speed adjustment control — User's
responsibility
If the speed of the machine wheel spindle is
adjustable to compensate for wheel wear,
the speed adjustment shall be under the
supervision and control of competent and
authorized persons only. The speed control
setting shall be checked for proper speed
whenever a wheel change is made and after
maintenance or repair that could affect the
speed of the machine.
104
A stroboscope is also recommended to check
the speed (RPM), especially on those ma-
chines where it is impossible or impractical
to use a tachometer. See illustration 79 for
recommended frequency of speed measure-
ment of various machine types.
E 7.3 Speed adjustment control — User’s
responsibility
Certain machines are designed with adjust-
able speeds to permit maintenance of effi-
cient surface speeds by increasing the
spindle speed (RPM) to compensate for
wheel wear. Never exceed the maximum
surface feet per minute (SFPM) established
by the wheel manufacturer. This can be in-
terpolated from the RPM marked for the full
size wheel (see conversion table 35 for con-
verting RPM to SFPM). Special care must be
exercised under proper supervision to be
certain that the foregoing procedure is fol-
lowed.

8 Special speeds
8.1 Introduction
This section of the standard defines the re-
quirements for special speeds as well as the
conditions and responsibilities of the wheel
manufacturer, the machine supplier (e.g.
manufacturer, reconstructor, modifier, in-
staller, integrator; including one who con-
verts, changes, or otherwise alters a grind-
ing or cutting-off machine from the design or
purpose as originally supplied).
Special speeds apply to wheels and ma-
chines used at speeds in excess of those
listed in table 23, page 99.
8.2 Requirements for special speeds
Wheels used on special applications at
speeds higher than those listed in table 23,
page 99, shall only be used subject to the
following three conditions on effectively
guarded, fully protected machines.
8.2.1 Condition A — The wheel manufac-
turer
The wheel manufacturer shall make certain
that the wheels are of adequate strength,
have been tested at a suitable overspeed in
accordance with sections 8.3.2 and 8.3.3,
pages 106 - 107, and bear the wheel
manufacturer's approval of the higher speed.
See section 1.2.51, page 5, for definition of
"wheel manufacturer."
8.2.2 Condition B — The machine supplier
The machine supplier shall make certain at
time of manufacture that the machine is of
suitable design and adequately guarded for
the operation in question. See section 1.2.49,
page 5, for definition of "machine supplier."
It shall be the machine builder's responsibil-
ity to consult with a wheel manufacturer to
determine that a wheel for the special speed
application can be manufactured and tested
in accordance with the requirements in sec-
tion 8.3.2.
ANSI B7.1-2000
Explanatory Information
(NOT PART OF ANSI STANDARD)
E 8.1 Introduction
This section of the standard is designed to
recognize the importance of continuing de-
velopment in the science of grinding with
bonded abrasive wheels. Research has fre-
quently shown an increase in productivity
with increased wheel speed. However, the
destructive forces of a broken wheel also
increase exponentially with increased speed.
Consequently, a constant reference to, and
a knowledge of the requirements of this stan-
dard will be helpful in the development of
new, safe equipment.
E 8.2 Requirements for special speeds
When wheels are used at speeds in excess
of standard speeds listed in table 23,
page 99, extra precautions should be ob-
served to assure safe operation of the abra-
sive wheel.
E 8.2.1 Condition A — The wheel manu-
facturer
The wheel manufacturer should do such test-
ing as he deems necessary to establish an
adequate factor of safety before approving
the wheel for the higher speed. The wheel
should be marked that it has been approved
for high speed application under specific
conditions of use.
E 8.2.2 Condition B — The machine supplier
The machine supplier should be sure the
components of the machine such as spindle,
bearings, guards, flanges, horsepower, etc.,
are adequate for the grinding operation. Be-
cause of design and composition limitations,
certain abrasive wheels will not be suitable
for special speed operations. It is therefore,
important that the machine supplier and abra-
sive wheel manufacturer cooperate to make
certain a wheel of adequate strength can be
manufactured for the operation in question.
105
ANSI B7.1-2000
8.2.3 Condition C — The user E 8.2.3 Condition C — The user
The machine user shall make certain that The minimum guard requirements of sec-
the machine is approved to be operated at tion 4, page 50, should be met. Where guard
the special wheel speed and that the ma- data for the wheel size and operating speed
chine is maintained in a satisfactory condi- to be used are not available, requirements
tion, as defined in sections 3 and 4. See should be established by actual test. The
section 1.3.27, page 16, for definition of machine user should also maintain machines
"user." in good condition for continuing safety (see
section 3, page 38).
8.3 Wheel manufacturer's responsibility E 8.3 Wheel manufacturer's responsibility
It shall be the wheel manufacturer's respon- It is important that wheels used at special
sibility to speed test each and every wheel speeds be tested and identified for use at
required for special speeds as follows. the proper maximum operating speeds.
8.3.1 Blade tensioning E 8.3.1 Blade tensioning
Steel centered superabrasive cut-off wheels Blade tensioning requires the use of various
must be tensioned for the speed at which means to neutralize the residual stresses so
they are intended to be used; tested for the that the wheel will run true at the speed for
intended speed and marked with the which it is marked. The wheel is tensioned
maximum intended speed. and tested at the intended speed by the
manufacturer. The intended or marked speed
Exception:
may be less than the maximum speed al-
Cut-off wheels 18" or less in diameter which lowed (16,000 SFPM). The lower speeds
are marked in equivalent RPM for operation (8,000 to 12,000 SFPM) have been found to
at or less than 12,000 SFPM. be the optimum speed for the best cutting
action and economy. The operating speed is
8.3.2 Manufacturer's test for vitrified
stamped, etched or otherwise marked on the
bonded wheels
core in RPM.
It shall be the wheel manufacturer's respon-
sibility to speed test all wheels operated at
speeds higher than the standard speeds as
listed in table 23, page 99, in accordance
with table 25, page 101.
Exceptions: Wheels that need not be speed
tested are:
a. wheels less than 4" diameter;
b. wheels 4" diameter but less than 6" di-
ameter where the diameter (inches) mul-
tiplied by thickness (inches) is one or
less;
c. segments;
d. segmental disc wheels and disc wheels
which are not plate mounted;
e. mounted wheels.
A manufacturer may subject the vitrified
bonded wheel specification to ANSI B74.21,
Fatigue Proof Test Procedure for Vitrified
Grinding Wheels. This procedure outlines a
method to calculate a speed test necessary
to assure against premature failure due to

106
 ANSI B7.1-2000
fatigue. The calculated speed test is a func-
tion of the maximum operating speed, the
useful lifetime of the wheel and the suscep-
tibility of the wheel to fatigue. The speed
test factor calculated using this procedure
may be used instead of the value of 1.5
specified in table 25, page 101. If the speed
test factor calculated is less than 1.2, then a
value of no less than 1.2 shall be used.
8.3.3 Manufacturer's test for organic E 8.3.3 Manufacturer's test
bonded and all other bonded wheels, ex-
For wheels not subject to the speed test,
cept vitrified bonded wheels
other means should be used to ensure ad-
It shall be the wheel manufacturer's respon- equate strength for the higher speeds.
sibility to speed test all wheels operated at
It is important that wheels used at special
speeds higher than the standard speeds as
speeds be tested and identified for use at
listed in table 23, page 99, in accordance
the proper maximum operating speeds.
with table 25, page 101.
Exceptions: Wheels that need not be speed
tested are:
a. wheels less than 4" diameter;
b. wheels 4" diameter but less than 6" di-
ameter where the product of diameter
(inches) multiplied by thickness (inches)
is one or less;
c. segments;
d. segmental disc wheels and disc wheels
which are not plate mounted;
e. mounted wheels;
f. metal centered (not powdered metal),
metal bonded Type 1A1 and segmental
diamond and CBN wheels.
8.3.4 Identification E 8.3.4 Identification
It shall be the wheel manufacturer's respon- Wheels approved for special speed applica-
sibility to identify wheels which may be run tions should have the special speed indi-
at special speeds. cated on the wheels, blotters, accompanying
tags, stickers or container.
8.4 Machine supplier's responsibility E 8.4 Machine supplier’s responsibility
It shall be the responsibility of the machine The machine supplier should decide upon
supplier to design and construct those ma- the fitness of the machine for it's intended
chine components which are concerned with use and supply the machine in conformance
the proper and safe operation of the grinding to this standard. If it becomes necessary or
or cutting-off wheels for the speed and the desirable to change the machine from it's
type of operation for which the machine is original intended use, it is important to rec-
intended. The design and construction shall ognize that any safety related machine modi-
conform to this standard. fication must conform to this standard and
that the modifier bares the sole responsibil-
ity for it.

107
ANSI B7.1-2000
8.5 User's responsibility
The user shall be responsible for the proper
handling, storage, and inspection of abra-
sive wheels after receipt in accordance with
the requirements of section 2, page 27, and
section 6.1, page 87.
It shall be the responsibility of the user to
maintain his grinding equipment in a safe
operating condition at all times. Rules of
safe operation of this equipment submitted
by the machine supplier shall be observed,
as well as those rules specified in other
sections of this standard.
When an existing machine is altered by the
user to operate at special speeds, the user
shall assume all of the responsibility of a
machine supplier as outlined in this stan-
dard.
The user shall fully inform all operating per-
sonnel that only wheels identified for opera-
tion at special speeds shall be used and that
at no time shall the maximum speed of the
wheel be exceeded.
Protection to operating personnel, as well as
adjacent areas, shall be maintained at all
times.
108
E 8.5 User's responsibility
The maximum operating speed as determined
by the manufacturer is dependent on the
wheel shape and strength. The strength of a
bonded abrasive wheel may be defined as
the ability of the wheel to withstand rota-
tional stress.
Under no condition should a wheel be oper-
ated faster than the maximum operating
speed established by the manufacturer. This
is the responsibility of the wheel user.
It is an important responsibility of the user to
maintain grinding in a safe operating condi-
tion. Machine suppliers usually issue rules
for the safe operation of their equipment or
fasten warning signs to their machines call-
ing attention to areas that could be unsafe if
the rules or signs are disregarded. The user
should recognize the importance of instruct-
ing personnel concerning these safety warn-
ings.
Furthermore, grinding machines are usually
designed to perform certain specific opera-
tions. It is strongly recommended that the
machines be used only on those types of
operations for which they are designed.
 ANSI B7.1-2000

Explanatory Information
(NOT PART OF ANSI STANDARD)
9 General operating rules

9.1 User’s responsibility E 9.1 User’s responsibility

Competent, trained persons shall be assigned More efficient grinding and reduction of wheel
to the mounting, care, and inspection of abra- breakage will result when the user insists
sive wheels and grinding machines. that only personnel with mechanical aptitude
and a good knowledge of the contents of this
The abrasive wheel operator shall be fully
Standard be assigned to the mounting, care,
instructed in the use, care and protection of
inspection and operation of abrasive wheels
abrasive wheels as defined in this Standard.
and grinding machines.
Any user who alters the wheel other than
normal truing or dressing assumes the re-
sponsibility of the wheel manufacturer (see
section 1.2.51, page 5).
9.2 Airborne particulates control E 9.2 Airborne particulates control
The user shall install and operate grinding Control may be accomplished by such items
machines so that airborne particulates as exhausts on wheel safety guards, collect-
caused by the grinding operation shall not ing hoods, auxiliary exhaust collecting de-
exceed threshold limit values. Steps shall be vices or approved dust respirators where
taken to control and dispose of the swarf in dust collectors cannot be used.
an approved and safe manner with respect
These airborne particulates are generated
to both health and environment.
during the grinding process by the workpiece,
grinding wheel and coolant when used.
Refer to Part 1910, Subpart Z of OSHA Regu-
lations for Threshold Limit Values and List-
ing of Toxic and Hazardous Substances.
9.3 Personal protective equipment E 9.3 Personal protective equipment
9.3.1 Eye and face protection Operator and personal protection are basic
requirements and are in addition to the other
Safety goggles or safety spectacles shall be
requirements of this standard, such as
worn by all personnel exposed to grinding
guards, speeds, etc. The Z87.1 Standard
operations where dust, swarf, or flying par-
Practice for Occupational and Educational
ticles are generated. Where the nature of
Eye and Face Protection provides the means
the operation requires additional face pro-
for the selection and safe use of face and
tection, a face shield also shall be worn.
eye protective equipment. These plus ad-
Such safety devices shall be in accordance
equate, well designed protective clothing will
with ANSI Z87.1.
allow efficient and safer work.
9.3.2 Protective clothing
Protective clothing such as aprons, gloves,
safety shoes, and others, shall be worn for
protection from sparks, swarf, and flying
particles when a grinding operation pre-
sents a hazard to the operator or adjacent
personnel.

109
ANSI B7.1-2000
9.4 Wheel breakage
A cracked or damaged wheel shall not be
used.
Wheel breakage shall be investigated by the
user to determine and correct the cause. In
the event of a wheel breakage which causes
personal injury, the wheel manufacturer and
the machine supplier should be notified im-
mediately.
9.5 Wheel speed
It shall be determined at time of mounting a
new wheel that spindle speed does not ex-
ceed the maximum operating speed marked
on the wheel or wheel package. When a
partly used wheel is remounted, spindle
speed in revolutions per minute may exceed
the maximum revolutions per minute marked
on the wheel provided the maximum periph-
eral speed (surface feet per minute) estab-
lished for the wheel when new is not ex-
ceeded. (See sections 1.2.97, page 11 and
1.2.72, page 8, for explanations and calcula-
tion of peripheral speed from revolutions per
minute. Also, wheel speed conversion table,
table 35, on page 137 may be helpful.)
9.5.1 Tensioned speed
It shall be determined at time of mounting a
steel centered diamond cutting-off wheel that
spindle speed is within +10%/-20% of the
tensioned speed marked on the wheel.
9.6 Flanges
All grinding wheels or cutting-off wheels shall
be mounted with flanges in accordance with
the requirements listed in section 5, page 72.
110
E 9.4 Wheel breakage
Should an abrasive wheel be broken in ser-
vice, an investigation must be made immedi-
ately by the user to be sure that any condi-
tions at variance with the requirements con-
tained in this Standard and State, Federal,
or other laws are corrected.
The user should immediately isolate the ma-
chine and work area and notify the wheel
maker and machine supplier. Corrections of
adverse conditions should only be made fol-
lowing a complete investigation and recom-
mendation by all parties concerned. This will
help determine the cause of the breakage so
that a recurrence of the trouble can be pre-
vented.
E 9.5 Wheel speed
On some variable speed machines, spindle
speed is governed by an interlock with the
guard or some other device that allows the
RPM to be increased as wheel diameter de-
creases. Care must be exercised to deter-
mine that such devices are in good working
order to prevent the possibility of over-speed-
ing and wheel breakage.
Machine suppliers usually offer maintenance
literature which can be useful in preventing
wheel failure caused by overspeed condi-
tions. Variable pitch pulleys require continual
maintenance to remain in proper working
order.
E 9.5.1 Tensioned speed
If the steel centered cutting-off wheel is op-
erated at a speed substantially different from
the speed it was tensioned for, it will not run
true, i.e., it may wobble or flutter. Therefore,
the user must operate within the recom-
mended speed range. Failure to do so could
cause damage to or failure of the wheel's
steel center leading to serious personal in-
jury.
E 9.6 Flanges
Proper selection, use and maintenance of
flanges are all essential factors in accor-
dance with the requirements listed in sec-
tion 5, page 72.
 ANSI B7.1-2000
9.7 Safety guard E 9.7 Safety guard
Grinding wheels shall not be operated on It is unsafe to operate any grinding machine
any machine which has had its safety guard with the wheel safety guard removed. Safety
removed. guards should never be removed to accom-
modate a wheel size or type that otherwise
At the completion of wheel mounting, the
could not be mounted on the machine or to
safety guard shall be in place and should be
accommodate a situation where the guard
checked for condition and adjustment. All
might interfere with the grinding operation.
safety guard fasteners shall be in place and
properly tightened. For portable machines,
safety guards shall be inspected periodi-
cally. Safety guards shall be in good func-
tional condition. Damaged, bent, and se-
verely worn guards shall be replaced. A guard
which has been subjected to a wheel break-
age is likely to be weakened internally and
shall not be reused. On all other grinders,
guards may be repairable depending on the
amount of damage suffered during the wheel
breakage. It is the user’s responsibility to
insure that a damaged guard is repaired or
replaced to insure the machine is recondi-
tioned to its original state and safe to be
operated.
9.8 Starting the wheel E 9.8 Starting the wheel
All abrasive wheels shall be run at operating An abrasive wheel may be damaged in ship-
speeds with the safety guard in place or in a ment or storage or the wheel may be sub-
protected enclosure for at least one minute jected to improper, excessive stresses dur-
before applying work. During this time no ing mounting. Wheels which have been dam-
one shall stand in front of or in line with the aged or are under excessive stress are likely
wheel. (See section 4, page 50.) to fracture within the first minute of rotation
at operating speed.
This provision shall apply each time one of
the following conditions occur: While this procedure is most important at the
time when an abrasive wheel is mounted or
a. a new wheel has been mounted;
remounted, damage may also occur to a
b. a used wheel has been remounted. wheel during a shut down of the machine on
which it is mounted. The user should evalu-
ate the circumstances and length of machine
shut down to determine additional times that
the operating rule should be followed.
9.9 Vibration E 9.9 Vibration
Vibration in a portable grinder mounted with Some of the most common conditions of
a new grinding wheel may be caused by vibration are as follows:
various conditions. The cause of unusual
a. worn bearings in the grinder;
vibration shall be determined and corrected.
b. a grinder spindle manufactured or worn
undersize, causing an improper fit between
the wheel and the spindle;
c. bent, burred or distorted flanges that re-
sult in an out-of-truth condition in the

111
ANSI B7.1-2000
9.10 Balance
Out of balance wheels which set up vibra-
tions can result in marred work surfaces,
machine damage and also cause stresses
which could contribute to wheel failure.
Wheels which cannot be corrected for imbal-
ance by the user shall not be used.
112
mounted grinding wheel, or flanges of im-
proper size;
d. a grinding wheel which is excessively out
of balance or which is excessively loose on
a grinder spindle that is in dimensional toler-
ance;
e. use of a wheel type or size on a grinder
for which is was not designed;
f. the characteristics of different grinding
machines may cause a grinding wheel to
vibrate differently when switched from one
type of grinder to another.
These conditions may exist individually or in
combination. Portable grinders with the wear
problems listed above may appear to not
show signs of vibration when run without a
wheel. It requires the mass of the wheel
mounted on the grinder to make these wear
problems obvious.
If after mounting a new wheel on a portable
grinder a condition of excess vibration oc-
curs, the grinder should be stopped, the
wheel removed, and the tool should be
checked for the above conditions. After ex-
amining, repairing if necessary, and assur-
ing that the tool is in good operating condi-
tion, mount another new wheel and see if the
condition still persists. If the condition per-
sists, do not use the wheel and contact the
wheel supplier.
The inherent nature of the process of grind-
ing produces some vibration. If a wheel that
did not vibrate excessively when new vi-
brates excessively after it has been partially
used, remove the wheel, examine the grinder
for wear conditions listed above and mount a
new wheel. If the grinder is in good operat-
ing condition and if the same vibration con-
dition repeats, check with the supplier of the
wheels to assure that you are using the
proper wheel for your application.
E 9.10 Balance
On precision grinding machines equipped
with balance adjustment devices, wheel/
spindle assemblies should be corrected for
imbalance by utilizing such devices.
When a grinding machine has no included
precision balance adjustment device, balance
must be accomplished by other means. Usu-

9.11 Truing and dressing
Truing is the process of forming the abrasive
wheel cutting surfaces in order to eliminate
runout; to form the geometrical shape and to
expose new sharp cutting edges of the abra-
sive grains
Dressing is the process of removing bond
material from around the cutting grains or
diamonds in order to expose new, sharp
cutting edges and to provide chip clearance
for the material removal process.
A bonded abrasive wheel that cannot be
trued shall not be used.
9.12 Wet grinding
When shutting down a wet grinding opera-
tion, the coolant should first be shut off and
the wheel allowed to rotate until coolant has
been spun out.
The strength of organic bonded wheels can
be affected by coolants. The concentration
and alkalinity of the coolant should be
checked regularly and adjusted according to
the recommendations of the coolant manu-
facturer.
9.13 Side grinding
Side grinding should only be performed with
wheels designed for this purpose. Grinding
on the flat sides of wheels designed for
ANSI B7.1-2000
ally this means dressing or truing the wheel as
shown in illustration 80, page 113, or with
other devices such as diamond dressers.
On wheels provided with “mount up” or “mount
down” marks, the mounting of the wheel should
be checked (see sections 1.2.55 and 1.2.56).
E 9.11 Truing and dressing
A method of dressing a wheel used in off-
hand operation is shown in illustration 80.
Note that the dresser should be supported
on a work rest, and that the work rest should
be adjusted away from the wheel so that the
heel of the dresser may hook over the work
rest and be guided by it as the dresser is
moved evenly across the wheel surface.
"Bumping" a wheel with a heavy casting or
other object is dangerous and will not dress
a wheel properly.
Illustration 80 – A correct and
incorrect method of dressing a
wheel for off-hand operations
E 9.12 Wet grinding
Uneven accumulation of coolant can cause
excessive out-of-balance in a wheel.
The concentration and alkalinity of coolants
determines the degree to which they affect
organic bonded wheels. To avoid injurious
affect upon these wheels, it is important to
follow the directions of the coolant manufac-
turer.
E 9.13 Side grinding
Straight grinding wheels of the Types 1, 5, 7,
and 20 through 26 have limited side strength
and are not supported to withstand high side
113
ANSI B7.1-2000
peripheral grinding may be dangerous and
cause broken wheels. This does not pre-
clude their use for applications such as shoul-
der, contour and form grinding where it is
recognized a limited amount of side grinding
is performed. Extreme caution should be
exercised not to use excessive side pres-
sure or substantially reduce wheel width by
side dressing.
9.14 Lubrication
The machine spindle bearings shall be prop-
erly lubricated to prevent overheating or other
conditions which might damage the abrasive
wheel. Lubrication practices shall comply with
the machine or equipment supplier’s recom-
mended practices.
9.15 Machine maintenance
An employer shall maintain grinding equip-
ment in a condition which will not create a
hazard for an employee. The employer shall
instruct an employee to report defective
equipment to an employee supervisor. In the
event of a wheel breakage, the grinder shall
be inspected and returned to safe operating
condition before being returned to service.
9.16 Work rests
An off-hand grinder shall be equipped with a
work rest or other device which shall prevent
114
pressure as may be generated by side grind-
ing.
However, these wheels may be used for a
limited amount of shoulder, contour and form
grinding as done on precision grinding ma-
chines, such as, Universal Centertype,
centerless and internal grinders. Care must
be exercised in these applications not to
generate excessive side pressure due to high
stock removal or large contact areas on the
wheel side. Repeated side dressing which
substantially reduces the wheel width and
weakens the wheel shall be avoided.
Wheels designed for side grinding, such as
Type 2 wheels and abrasive discs, are
mounted with one flat side against a suitable
steel machine plate to safely withstand side
pressure.
Cutting-off wheels are thin and do not have
great lateral strength. Care should be taken
to avoid twisting, cocking, cramping, or ex-
erting excessive pressure on the side of the
wheel. This is particularly true on portable
cutting-off machines where the work is held
and the wheel is guided by hand or on op-
erations where the work is not clamped. On
such operations only reinforced wheels shall
be used.
E 9.14 Lubrication
Improperly lubricated spindle bearings will
cause the mounting spindle to expand be-
cause of heat generated, thus exerting a
stress in the arbor hole area.
Other adverse conditions related to improper
lubrication can cause vibration which may
result in a wheel being broken.
E 9.15 Machine maintenance
Proper machine maintenance procedures are
one of the most important aspects of safety
in the use of abrasive wheels. Particular
attention should be placed on those compo-
nents or parts which can affect the speed of
a wheel, such as governors on air grinders,
variable pitch pulleys, gear boxes, and rheo-
stat or other type electrical controls.
E 9.16 Work rests
Jamming of the workpiece is a cause of
wheel breakage and operator injury. Where
 ANSI B7.1-2000
the work piece from jamming between the work rests are not usable such machines
abrasive wheel and the wheel guard. should be identified by warning signs, locked
out when not in use or closely supervised as
The work rest or other device shall not con-
to use.
tact the abrasive wheel any time and shall
be properly maintained.
When work rests are used, the following
conditions shall be maintained at all times:
1. The work rest shall be adjusted such that
the gap between the work rest and the
grinding surface of the abrasive wheel
shall not exceed 1 / 8 inch.
2. The work rest height shall be on the
horizontal center line of the machine
spindle.
3. The work rest shall not be adjusted while
the abrasive wheel is rotating unless the
work rest is designed to allow such ad-
justment.
4. The work rest shall be securely clamped
after each adjustment.
When a work rest cannot be used in accor-
dance with items 1 and 2 above, because of
job requirements, the work rest can be ad-
justed, modified, or eliminated to accommo-
date the operation. In that circumstance, the
user assumes all responsibility for this modi-
fication and the continued safe operation of
the grinding machine. The user shall in this
Illustration 81 – This floor stand grinder has a
case provide a means for prohibiting the use
work rest which is property adjusted
of the grinder for other than the job for which
the work rest was modified.
9.17 Large hole inorganic bonded wheels E 9.17 Large hole inorganic bonded
wheels
Large hole inorganic bonded wheels (those
with holes in excess of 1 / 4 of the wheel diam- Since the cross-sectional strength of an abra-
eter) should not be used on snagging opera- sive wheel decreases as its diameter ap-
tions. proaches its hole size, it is not safe to use
large hole inorganic wheels for most snag-
ging operations. Large hole inorganic bonded
wheels cannot be manufactured with retain-
ing media such as steel rings. (See section
1.2.84, page 9.)
9.18 Wheel discard size E 9.18 Wheel discard size
The usable portion of an abrasive wheel Wheels which have been removed from one
shall be considered to be that portion which operation may be remounted as a smaller
extends beyond the mounting flanges. A diameter wheel on another operation or ma-
wheel shall not be worn down to a size which chine, provided that proper mounting, speed
would allow the mounting flange assembly to and guarding regulations are observed.

115
ANSI B7.1-2000
contact the workpiece or workpiece holding
fixture.
9.19 Wheel type for machine E 9.19 Wheel type for machine
The type of bonded abrasive wheel used on It is unsafe to use a type of bonded abrasive
any machine or tool shall only be that type or wheel on a machine or tool that the machine
types for which that machine or tool has or tool is not intended for, such as using a
been designed. The machine manufacturers' cut-off wheel on a right angle grinder. Also,
recommendations shall always be complied some sanding machines run at high speeds
with concerning the type of wheel to be used which are dangerous when used with certain
and the machine or tool must have the proper bonded abrasive wheels. Although appropri-
guarding, mounting and maximum speed lim- ate for the proper coated abrasive paper or
iting devices in accordance with this stan- cloth products, these machines may not be
dard. properly guarded nor have appropriate
mounting devices for bonded abrasive
9.20 Machine conversions
wheels.
Bonded abrasive wheels may be used on
machines or tools such as sanders which
have been converted to a grinder in accor-
dance with the machine or tool manufactur-
ers' specifications and conforming to the pro-
visions of this standard in respect to wheel
design, guarding, mounting and speed.
9.21 Wheel specification E 9.21 Wheel specification
Bonded abrasive wheels shall only be used It can be unsafe to use a bonded abrasive
to grind materials for which the wheel com- wheel to grind a material that it was not
position is designed. The wheel manufactur- designed for since wheel breakage and in-
ers' recommendations must be followed re- jury can result.
garding the kinds of material to be ground
with any particular wheel.

116

10 Mounted wheels
10.1 Standard maximum speeds
The maximum operating speed for mounted
wheels shall be determined by the following
four factors:
1. shape and size of the mounted wheel;
2. size of the mandrel;
3. overhang of the mandrel (see figure 47);
4. wheel specification.
Taking the first three factors noted above
into consideration, look up the maximum
operating speed in the corresponding tables
26 through 34, pages 121 through 136. The
overhangs indicated on the charts are for
unthreaded mandrels. Threaded mandrels will
take the same speed as the 1 / 2 " overhang of
the unthreaded mandrel.
Tables 26 through 34, pages 121 through
136, have been established to cover most
mounted wheel specifications. Where these
tables are not applicable, the mounted wheel
manufacturer shall designate the maximum
operating speed. In no case shall this maxi-
mum operating speed be exceeded, for the
overhang to be used.
No matter what factors of wheel size, shape,
specification, mandrel size, overhang or ma-
chine conditions are changed, the speed of
10,000 surface feet per minute (SFPM) shall
not be exceeded without full consideration of
section 8 of this code.
ANSI B7.1-2000
Explanatory Information
(NOT PART OF ANSI STANDARD)
E 10.1 Standard maximum speeds
There is a limiting speed beyond which no
mounted wheel should be run due to the
inherent strength of the abrasive body itself.
In addition to this, maximum operating
speeds for mounted wheels are generally
limited by the size and shape of the wheel,
the mandrel material and diameter, and the
distance from the mounting chuck to the
abrasive body (overhang).
Due to the size of some mounted wheels, it
is necessary to reduce the size of the man-
drel where it enters the wheel. These are
called tapered mandrels. It will be noted,
however, that the resistance to bending or
whipping due to speed is dependent on the
size of the mandrel at the point where it is
chucked, so that the size of the mandrel for
speed purposes will be the diameter of the
chucked section.
As threading reduces the effective diameter
of the mandrel, mounted wheels with
threaded mandrels require lower operating
speeds than the same size unthreaded man-
drels. Because these mandrels are usually
short and held closely in the chuck, the tables
give only the speeds for 1 / 2 " overhang.
Tables 26 to 34, pages 121 to 136, indicate
the maximum operating speeds for various
standard mounted wheels in combination with
several standard mandrel sizes and various
overhangs. For many common combinations,
the maximum operating speeds can be read
directly from the tables. For intermediate
wheel and mandrel sizes and overhangs not
shown, the maximum operating speed can
be determined by interpolations.
If it is found that the desired combination of
conditions would result in operation beyond
the maximum speed, a slight change in any
one of the following conditions may be all
that is necessary to eliminate the danger of
117
ANSI B7.1-2000
Figure 47 – Dimension "O" indicates overhang
of mandrel
10.2 Work pressure
Pressure between the wheel and the work
shall not be so heavy that excessive spring-
ing of the mandrel will result.
10.3 Mandrel material
The material used for mandrels shall have a
tensile strength of at least 90,000 psi.
10.4 Mounted wheels on portable air grinders
The wheel mandrel shall be inserted to the
full depth of the gripping jaws of the grinder
collet.
118
operating over the maximum speed. Such
corrective steps are:
1. For a given shape, reducing the size of
the wheel (either diameter or thickness,
or both) will raise the maximum speed.
2. Increasing the diameter of the mandrel
will raise the maximum speed.
3. Reducing the overhang (pushing the man-
drel back into the chuck) will raise the
maximum speed.
E. 10.2 Work pressure
Work pressure, if excessive, can be the cause
of trouble and a source of danger, through
bending or fracture of the mandrel. If there is
burning of the work or excessive reduction in
mandrel speed, it is quite likely that exces-
sive pressure is being used. A freer cutting
wheel specification may permit the desired
rate of stock removal without excessive pres-
sure.
Illustration 82 – A mounted wheel being used
to finish a die
 ANSI B7.1-2000

TABLES OF MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEEDS

FOR
MOUNTED WHEELS

119
ANSI B7.1-2000

D D
T D
T T T

Illustration 83 – Mounted wheels

standard shapes
group “W”

120
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 26 – Group W — (plain wheels) Maximum operating speeds (RPM) for 3/32" mandrels

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
W 141 3/32 5/32 93,800 56,450 39,000 26,540 16,060
W 142 3/32 1/4 88,900 52,790 36,590 25,360 16,130
W 143 1/8 1/8 93,360 56,110 38,760 26,400 16,020
W 144 1/8 1/4 86,300 50,700 35,010 24,300 15,570
W 145 1/8 3/8 80,390 46,440 32,400 23,340 16,270
W 146 1/8 1/2 75,850 43,550 31,170 23,760 18,350
W 147 5/32 1/32 95,330 57,350 39,280 26,180 15,080
W 148 5/32 1/16 94,800 57,230 39,570 26,890 16,200
W 149 5/32 1/4 83,700 48,610 33,430 23,230 15,020
W 150 3/16 1/16 92,870 55,810 38,660 26,490 16,310
W 151 3/16 1/8 89,050 52,820 36,500 25,150 15,800
W 152 3/16 1/4 81,100 46,520 31,850 22,160 14,460
W 153 3/16 3/8 74,290 41,370 28,350 20,310 14,270
W 154 3/16 1/2 68,860 37,590 26,230 19,840 15,450
W 155 13/64 1/4 79,790 45,480 31,060 21,630 14,180
W 156 1/4 1/32 89,870 53,420 36,880 25,320 15,750
W 157 1/4 1/16 89,000 52,970 36,850 25,700 16,540
W 158 1/4 1/8 84,740 49,530 34,230 23,910 15,580
W 159 1/4 3/16 80,210 45,830 31,360 21,870 14,360
W 160 1/4 1/4 75,890 42,340 28,690 20,030 13,350
W 161 1/4 5/16 71,870 39,150 26,330 18,490 12,640
W 162 1/4 3/8 68,190 36,290 24,300 17,290 12,260
W 165 5/16 1/16 85,140 50,130 35,030 24,900 16,770
W 166 5/16 1/8 80,420 46,240 31,970 22,670 15,360
W 167 5/16 1/4 70,690 38,160 25,540 17,890 12,240
W 168 5/16 5/16 66,220 34,520 22,730 15,910 11,080
W 169 5/16 3/8 62,090 31,220 20,250 14,260 10,260
W 170 5/16 1/2 54,870 25,650 16,340 12,000 9,650
W 171 5/16 3/4 44,720 18,810 12,800 11,770 10,740
W 172 3/8 1/16 81,270 47,290 33,210 24,110 17,000
W 173 3/8 1/8 76,110 42,950 29,700 21,430 15,140
W 174 3/8 1/4 65,480 33,980 22,380 15,760 11,130
W 175 3/8 3/8 55,990 26,140 16,200 11,230 8,250
W 176 3/8 1/2 47,880 19,680 11,390 8,080 6,750
*See figure 47, page 118

( ( ( (
Speed in RPM = 61484 + D × ( −71072)) + T × ( −76611)) + O × ( −22182)) + T 2 × 46559 + )
(D × T × (−114324)) + (D × O × 32746) + (T × O × 26455) +  T1 × (−117) +  O1 × 29861
Please note that No speed shall exceed 10,000 SFPM, even if calculations show higher and no speed can increase
as overhang increases. In rare cases calculated RPM may result in negative or illogical speeds (due to inconsis-
tences in ordinal data), do not use the formula when this occurs.

121
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 27 – Group W — (plain wheels) Maximum operating speeds (RPM) for 1/8" mandrels

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
W 143 1/8 1/8 102,200 74,340 57,320 43,010 29,780
W 144 1/8 1/4 92,460 66,130 50,640 37,850 26,160
W 145 1/8 3/8 84,190 59,390 45,430 34,170 24,000
W 146 1/8 1/2 76,820 53,550 41,120 31,390 22,760
W 151 3/16 1/8 91,740 64,700 48,490 35,000 22,580
W 152 3/16 1/4 82,070 56,560 41,880 29,920 19,030
W 153 3/16 3/8 73,880 49,890 36,740 26,310 16,960
W 154 3/16 1/2 66,580 44,130 32,510 23,600 15,780
W 157 1/4 1/16 91,700 64,710 48,560 35,110 22,750
W 158 1/4 1/8 84,930 58,700 43,310 30,630 19,040
W 159 1/4 3/16 79,850 54,390 39,770 27,850 17,020
W 160 1/4 1/4 75,330 50,640 36,780 25,630 15,560
W 161 1/4 5/16 71,150 47,210 34,120 23,730 14,430
W 162 1/4 3/8 67,210 44,040 31,710 22,090 13,550
W 163 1/4 1/2 59,990 38,350 27,550 19,460 12,450
W 164 1/4 3/4 47,880 29,300 21,550 16,520 12,570
W 165 5/16 1/16 86,320 60,140 44,800 32,170 20,630
W 166 5/16 1/8 79,580 54,170 39,590 27,730 16,950
W 167 5/16 1/4 70,060 46,170 33,130 22,800 13,540
W 168 5/16 5/16 65,900 42,790 30,510 20,940 12,450
W 169 5/16 3/8 62,010 39,650 28,140 19,330 11,610
W 170 5/16 1/2 54,860 34,040 24,050 16,770 10,580
W 171 5/16 3/4 42,890 25,130 18,200 13,980 10,850
W 172 3/8 1/16 81,660 56,300 41,780 29,960 19,230
W 173 3/8 1/8 74,960 50,360 36,600 25,560 15,590
W 174 3/8 1/4 65,510 42,440 30,210 20,690 12,260
W 175 3/8 3/8 57,530 35,990 25,290 17,300 10,400
W 176 3/8 1/2 50,460 30,450 21,280 14,820 9,440
W 177 3/8 3/4 38,640 21,690 15,570 12,170 9,850
W 178 3/8 1 29,760 15,870 12,810 12,470 12,130
*See figure 47, page 118 (continued)

122
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 27 (concluded)

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
W181 1/2 1/16 73,440 49,710 36,820 26,640 17,540
W 182 1/2 1/8 66,810 43,850 31,720 22,300 13,970
W 183 1/2 1/4 57,510 36,070 25,470 17,590 10,780
W 184 1/2 3/8 49,680 29,770 20,700 14,340 9,070
W 185 1/2 1/2 42,750 24,370 16,830 12,000 8,260
W 186 1/2 3/4 31,220 15,900 11,420 9,650 8,960
W 187 1/2 1 22,630 10,370 8,950 7,530 6,110
W 190 5/8 1/16 61,120 43,850 32,590 24,040 16,570
W 191 5/8 1/8 59,390 38,060 27,560 19,780 13,070
W 192 5/8 1/4 50,240 30,430 21,460 15,210 10,030
W 193 5/8 3/8 42,550 24,280 16,840 12,110 8,470
W 194 5/8 1/2 35,770 19,020 13,110 9,920 7,800
W 195 5/8 3/4 24,530 10,840 7,990 7,850 7,710
W 196 5/8 1 16,240 5,610 5,100 5,100 5,100
W 199 3/4 1/16 50,930 38,360 28,730 21,810 15,970
W 200 3/4 1/8 50,930 32,640 23,770 17,620 12,550
W 201 3/4 1/4 43,330 25,150 17,820 13,190 9,650
W 202 3/4 3/8 35,790 19,150 13,340 10,240 8,230
W 203 3/4 1/2 29,150 14,040 9,760 8,190 7,710
W 204 3/4 3/4 18,210 6,150 4,930 3,710 2,490
W 210 7/8 1/16 43,650 33,070 25,070 19,780 15,580
W 211 7/8 1/8 43,650 27,420 20,190 15,670 12,230
W 212 7/8 1/4 36,630 20,090 14,380 11,390 9,480
W 213 7/8 3/8 29,240 14,220 10,050 8,580 8,200
W 215 1 1/8 38,200 22,340 16,740 13,850 12,040
W 216 1 1/4 30,060 15,150 11,080 9,710 9,430
*See figure 47, page 118

( ( ( (
Speed in RPM = 76058 + D × ( −64803)) + T × ( −90754)) + O × ( −29523)) + T 2 × 22793 + )
(D × T × 9338) + (D × O × 26098) + (T × O × 24467) +   1  1 
1
× 2736 +  × 285 +  × 3527
D   T  O 

Please note that No speed shall exceed 10,000 SFPM, even if calculations show higher and no speed can increase
as overhang increases. In rare cases calculated RPM may result in negative or illogical speeds (due to inconsis-
tences in ordinal data), do not use the formula when this occurs.

123
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 28 – Group W — (plain wheels) Maximum operating speeds (RPM) for 3/16" mandrels

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
W 158 1/4 1/8 75,080 61,430 50,140 39,440 28,970
W 159 1/4 3/16 72,520 59,150 48,140 37,710 27,510
W 160 1/4 1/4 70,030 56,930 46,190 36,040 26,120
W 161 1/4 5/16 67,600 54,780 44,310 34,430 24,790
W 162 1/4 3/8 65,230 52,690 42,490 32,890 23,520
W 163 1/4 1/2 60,680 48,690 39,050 29,990 21,170
W 164 1/4 3/4 52,350 41,450 32,910 24,950 17,230
W 166 5/16 1/8 70,410 57,090 46,120 35,750 25,600
W 167 5/16 1/4 65,430 52,660 42,250 32,420 22,820
W 168 5/16 5/16 63,030 50,540 40,400 30,850 21,530
W 169 5/16 3/8 60,700 48,480 38,620 29,340 20,290
W 170 5/16 1/2 56,230 44,560 35,240 26,510 18,020
W 171 5/16 3/4 48,030 37,460 29,240 21,610 14,210
W 173 3/8 1/8 66,840 53,850 43,210 33,160 23,340
W 174 3/8 1/4 61,940 49,490 39,400 29,900 20,630
W 175 3/8 3/8 57,280 45,390 35,840 26,890 18,170
W 176 3/8 1/2 52,870 41,530 32,540 24,130 15,960
W 177 3/8 3/4 44,810 34,570 26,680 19,370 12,300
W 178 3/8 1 37,760 28,610 21,820 15,610 9,640
W 182 1/2 1/8 61,370 49,030 39,040 29,640 20,470
W 183 1/2 1/4 56,610 44,810 35,370 26,520 17,900
W 184 1/2 3/8 52,090 40,850 31,950 23,650 15,580
W 185 1/2 1/2 47,820 37,130 28,790 21,030 13,520
W 186 1/2 3/4 40,040 30,450 23,210 16,550 10,130
W 187 1/2 1 33,270 24,770 18,630 13,080 7,760
W 188 1/2 1 1/2 22,730 16,440 12,490 9,140 6,010
W 189 1/2 2 16,220 12,120 10,370 9,210 8,290
W 191 5/8 1/8 57,010 45,320 35,980 27,230 18,710
W 192 5/8 1/4 52,380 41,240 32,450 24,250 16,280
W 193 5/8 3/8 48,000 37,410 29,170 21,520 14,100
W 194 5/8 1/2 43,880 33,830 26,140 19,040 12,170
W 195 5/8 3/4 36,380 27,430 20,840 14,840 9,070
W 196 5/8 1 29,880 22,040 16,550 11,640 6,970
W 197 5/8 2 13,950 10,500 9,410 8,900 8,630
W 200 3/4 1/8 44,470 34,530 26,940 19,940 13,170
W 201 3/4 1/4 48,710 38,220 30,080 22,530 15,210
W 202 3/4 3/8 44,470 34,530 26,940 19,940 13,170
W 203 3/4 1/2 40,480 31,090 24,050 17,600 11,380
*See figure 47, page 118 (continued)

124
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 28 (concluded)

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
W 204 3/4 3/4 33,270 24,970 19,030 13,680 8,560
W 205 3/4 1 27,050 19,860 15,010 10,760 6,740
W 206 3/4 1 1/4 21,840 15,750 12,000 8,850 5,930
W 207 3/4 1 1/2 17,640 12,640 10,000 7,940 6,120
W 208 3/4 2 12,240 9,440 9,000 8,780 —
W 211 7/8 1/8 43,650 39,310 31,270 23,820 16,600
W 212 7/8 1/4 43,650 35,510 28,020 21,120 14,450
W 213 7/8 3/8 41,250 31,960 25,020 18,670 12,550
W 215 1 1/8 38,200 36,660 29,270 22,470 15,910
W 216 1 1/4 38,200 33,000 26,160 19,910 13,900
W 217 1 3/8 38,200 29,590 23,300 17,600 12,140
W 218 1 1/2 34,530 26,440 20,700 15,550 10,630
W 219 1 3/4 27,870 20,880 16,240 12,180 8,370
W 220 1 1 22,210 16,320 12,780 9,830 7,110
W 221 1 1 1/2 13,920 10,220 8,880 8,120 7,600
W 222 1 2 9,640 8,140 6,640 5,140 —
W 225 1 1/4 1/4 30,560 28,340 22,800 17,850 13,140
W 226 1 1/4 3/8 30,560 25,210 20,220 15,820 11,660
W 227 1 1/4 1/2 29,120 22,330 17,890 14,040 10,430
W 228 1 1/4 3/4 23,020 17,330 13,990 11,240 8,730
W 229 1 1/4 1 17,930 13,340 11,100 9,440 8,030
W 230 1 1/4 1 1/4 13,840 10,340 9,200 8,650 8,330
W 231 1 1/4 1 1/2 10,750 8,360 8,320 8,880 9,640
W 232 1 1/4 2 7,590 7,400 7,210 7,020 —
W 235 1 1/2 1/4 25,460 23,950 19,710 16,070 12,650
W 236 1 1/2 1/2 23,990 18,510 15,370 12,820 10,500
W 237 1 1/2 1 13,920 10,630 9,690 9,340 9,220
W 238 1 1/2 1 1/2 7,860 6,770 5,680 4,590 —
*See figure 47, page 118

( ( ( (
Speed in RPM = 74412 + D × ( −27987)) + T × ( −50036)) + O × ( −23933)) + T 2 × 8037 + )
(D × T × 8955) + (D × O × 10409) + (T × O × 8793) +   1 
1
× 4143 +  × 3527
D  O 

Please note that No speed shall exceed 10,000 SFPM, even if calculations show higher and no speed can increase
as overhang increases. In rare cases calculated RPM may result in negative or illogical speeds (due to inconsis-
tences in ordinal data), do not use the formula when this occurs.

125
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 29 – Group W — (plain wheels) Maximum operating speeds (RPM) for 1/4" mandrels

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diam. Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
W 176 3/8 1/2 47,880 37,770 32,450 28,320 24,680 21,270 14,810 8,600
W 177 3/8 3/4 43,910 34,070 29,010 25,150 21,770 18,630 12,700 7,020
W 178 3/8 1 40,360 30,780 25,990 22,390 19,270 16,400 11,000 5,850
W 179 3/8 1 1/4 37,210 27,900 23,370 20,040 17,190 14,580 9,710 5,090
W 182 1/2 1/8 51,190 40,810 35,220 30,820 26,900 23,220 16,220 9,460
W 183 1/2 1/4 48,850 38,600 33,140 28,870 25,090 21,540 14,800 8,310
W 184 1/2 3/8 46,610 36,490 31,160 27,030 23,380 19,960 13,490 7,260
W 185 1/2 1/2 44,470 34,490 29,290 25,290 21,770 18,490 12,280 6,310
W 186 1/2 3/4 40,500 30,790 25,850 22,120 18,860 15,840 10,170 4,730
W 187 1/2 1 36,950 27,490 22,830 19,360 16,370 13,610 8,470 3,560
W 188 1/2 1 1/2 31,070 22,140 18,010 15,070 12,610 10,380 6,300 2,450
W 189 1/2 2 26,830 18,440 14,830 12,420 10,490 8,800 5,770 2,990
W 190 5/8 1/16 50,120 39,800 34,260 29,920 26,060 22,440 15,560 8,910
W 191 5/8 1/8 48,910 38,660 33,190 28,910 25,120 21,560 14,810 8,300
W 192 5/8 1/4 46,570 36,450 31,110 26,970 23,300 19,880 13,400 7,150
W 193 5/8 3/8 44,330 34,340 29,130 25,120 21,600 18,300 12,080 6,100
W 194 5/8 1/2 42,190 32,330 27,260 23,380 19,990 16,830 10,870 5,160
W 195 5/8 3/4 38,220 28,630 23,820 20,210 17,080 14,190 8,760 3,580
W 196 5/8 1 34,670 25,340 20,800 17,450 14,590 11,960 7,060 2,410
W 197 5/8 2 24,550 16,280 12,800 10,510 8,710 7,140 4,370 1,830
W 198 5/8 2 1/2 21,950 14,210 11,260 9,510 8,230 7,200 5,480 4,010
W 201 3/4 1/4 44,850 34,850 29,640 25,630 22,090 18,790 12,550 6,560
W 202 3/4 3/8 42,610 32,750 27,670 23,780 20,380 17,210 11,240 5,510
W 203 3/4 1/2 40,480 30,740 25,790 22,040 18,770 15,740 10,030 4,560
W 204 3/4 3/4 36,510 27,040 22,360 18,870 15,860 13,100 7,920 2,980
W 205 3/4 1 32,950 23,750 19,330 16,110 13,370 9,460 6,220 1,810
W 206 3/4 1 1/4 29,810 20,870 16,720 13,760 11,280 6,790 4,930 12,720
W 207 3/4 1 1/2 27,070 18,400 14,510 11,820 9,610 4,820 4,050 12,720
W 208 3/4 2 22,830 14,690 11,330 9,170 7,490 2,520 3,520 1,240
W 209 3/4 2 1/2 20,240 12,620 9,800 8,170 7,020 6,100 4,640 3,410
W 211 7/8 1/8 43,650 35,800 30,580 26,550 23,010 19,700 13,450 7,430
W 212 7/8 1/4 43,460 33,590 28,500 24,610 21,190 18,020 12,030 6,280
W 213 7/8 3/8 41,220 31,480 26,520 22,760 19,480 16,440 10,720 5,240
*See figure 47, page 118 (continued)

126
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 29 (concluded)

D T
1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*
Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diam. Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
W 215 1 1/8 38,200 34,730 29,630 25,730 22,310 19,130 13,130 7,360
W 216 1 1/4 38,200 32,520 27,550 23,790 20,500 17,450 11,710 6,210
W 217 1 3/8 38,200 30,410 25,580 21,950 18,790 15,870 10,400 5,170
W 218 1 1/2 37,890 28,410 23,710 20,210 17,180 14,400 9,190 4,220
W 219 1 3/4 33,920 24,700 20,270 17,030 14,280 11,760 7,080 2,640
W 220 1 1 30,370 21,410 17,240 14,270 11,780 9,530 5,380 1,720
W 221 1 1 1/2 24,490 16,060 12,420 9,980 8,020 6,300 3,210 1,720
W 222 1 2 20,250 12,350 9,250 7,340 5,900 4,710 2,680 1,720
W 223 1 2 1/2 17,650 10,290 7,710 6,330 5,430 4,770 3,800 3,070
W 225 1 1/4 1/4 30,560 30,560 26,030 22,510 19,480 16,680 11,440 6,440
W 226 1 1/4 3/8 30,560 28,640 24,060 20,670 17,770 15,100 10,130 5,390
W 227 1 1/4 1/2 30,560 26,630 22,180 18,930 16,160 13,630 8,920 4,450
W 228 1 1/4 3/4 30,560 22,930 18,750 15,760 13,250 10,980 6,810 2,870
W 229 1 1/4 1 28,340 19,640 15,720 13,000 10,760 8,750 5,100 1,700
W 230 1 1/4 1 1/4 25,200 16,760 13,110 10,650 8,670 6,930 3,810 1,380
W 231 1 1/4 1 1/2 22,460 14,290 10,900 8,710 7,000 5,520 2,940 1,380
W 232 1 1/4 2 18,220 10,580 7,720 6,060 4,880 3,940 2,410 1,380
W 235 1 1/2 1/4 25,460 25,460 24,790 21,520 18,730 16,180 11,440 6,940
W 236 1 1/2 1/2 25,460 25,140 20,940 17,940 15,420 13,130 8,920 4,950
W 237 1 1/2 1 25,460 18,150 14,480 12,010 10,010 8,260 5,110 2,200
W 238 1 1/2 1 1/2 20,720 12,800 9,660 7,720 6,250 5,030 2,940 1,150
W 239 1 1/2 2 16,480 9,090 6,480 5,070 4,140 3,440 2,410 1,630
W 240 1 1/2 2 1/2 13,890 7,020 4,950 4,060 3,660 3,500 3,340 3,180
W 241 1 1/2 3 12,940 6,600 5,050 4,700 4,350 4,000 3,650 3,300
W 242 2 1 19,100 15,590 12,420 10,450 8,950 7,700 5,550 3,630
W 243 2 1 1/2 17,670 10,240 7,600 6,160 5,190 4,470 3,380 2,530
W 244 2 2 13,430 6,530 4,420 3,510 3,080 2,880 2,850 3,060
W 245 2 2 1/2 10,830 4,470 2,890 2,500 2,110 1,720 1,330 940
W 246 2 3 9,880 4,040 2,990 1,940 890 860 860 860
*See figure 47, page 118

( ( ( (
Speed in RPM = 37005 + D × ( −5703)) + T × ( −21035)) + O × ( −7666)) + T 2 × 3285 + )
(D × O × 1996) + (T × O × 2121) +   1 
1
× 4229 +  × 7180
D  O 

Please note that No speed shall exceed 10,000 SFPM, even if calculations show higher and no speed can increase
as overhang increases. In rare cases calculated RPM may result in negative or illogical speeds (due to inconsis-
tences in ordinal data), do not use the formula when this occurs.

127
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 30 – Group W — (plain wheels) Maximum operating speeds (RPM) for 3/8" mandrels

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diam. Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
W 185 1/2 1/2 64,130 56,110 48,730 42,000 35,900 30,430 21,420 14,970
W 186 1/2 3/4 58,950 51,230 44,160 37,720 31,910 26,750 18,340 12,480
W 187 1/2 1 54,500 47,090 40,310 34,170 28,660 23,800 15,990 10,730
W 188 1/2 1 1/2 46,860 40,040 33,860 28,320 23,410 19,150 12,530 8,470
W 189 1/2 2 40,500 34,280 28,700 23,750 19,440 15,780 10,360 7,490
W 194 5/8 1/2 61,120 53,360 46,150 39,580 33,650 28,350 19,680 13,560
W 195 5/8 3/4 56,080 48,530 41,620 35,350 29,710 24,720 16,640 11,120
W 196 5/8 1 51,680 44,430 37,820 31,850 26,510 21,810 14,340 9,410
W 197 5/8 2 37,880 31,820 26,410 21,630 17,490 13,990 8,900 6,370
W 198 5/8 2 1/2 32,750 27,300 22,480 18,300 14,760 11,860 7,970 6,630
W 203 3/4 1/2 50,930 50,930 43,900 37,500 31,730 26,610 18,270 12,490
W 204 3/4 3/4 50,930 46,170 39,420 33,320 27,850 23,020 15,280 10,100
W 205 3/4 1 49,200 42,120 35,670 29,870 24,700 20,170 13,030 8,440
W 206 3/4 1 1/4 45,300 38,520 32,370 26,860 22,000 17,770 11,220 7,230
W 207 3/4 1 1/2 41,760 35,270 29,420 24,220 19,650 15,720 9,770 6,380
W 208 3/4 2 35,590 29,700 24,460 19,850 15,870 12,540 7,790 5,600
W 209 3/4 2 1/2 30,570 25,280 20,630 16,620 13,240 10,510 6,950 5,950
W 218 1 1/2 38,200 38,200 38,200 34,050 28,620 23,830 16,160 11,050
W 219 1 3/4 38,200 38,200 35,740 29,970 24,840 20,340 13,270 8,760
W 220 1 1 38,200 38,190 32,080 26,610 21,780 17,590 11,120 7,200
W 221 1 1 1/2 37,690 31,540 26,030 21,160 16,930 13,330 8,050 5,330
W 222 1 2 31,730 26,170 21,260 16,990 13,350 10,350 6,270 4,750
W 223 1 2 1/2 26,900 21,950 17,630 13,950 10,920 8,520 5,630 5,300
W 227 1 1/4 1/2 30,560 30,560 30,560 30,560 26,240 21,780 14,780 10,340
W 228 1 1/4 3/4 30,560 30,560 30,560 27,350 22,550 18,390 11,990 8,150
W 229 1 1/4 1 30,560 30,560 29,230 24,090 19,590 15,740 9,930 6,690
W 230 1 1/4 1 1/4 30,560 30,560 26,120 21,290 17,090 13,530 8,320 5,670
W 231 1 1/4 1 1/2 30,560 28,550 23,370 18,840 14,940 11,680 7,070 5,020
W 232 1 1/4 2 28,590 23,380 18,800 14,860 11,560 8,900 5,490 4,630
*See figure 47, page 118 (continued)

128
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 30 (concluded)

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diam. Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
W 236 1 1/2 1/2 25,460 25,460 25,460 25,460 24,480 20,360 14,030 10,260
W 237 1 1/2 1 25,460 25,460 25,460 22,200 18,040 14,510 9,380 6,800
W 238 1 1/2 1 1/2 25,460 25,460 21,340 17,140 13,580 10,650 6,710 5,330
W 239 1 1/2 2 25,460 21,210 16,960 13,360 10,390 8,070 5,330 5,140
W 240 1 1/2 2 1/2 21,660 17,370 13,730 10,720 8,350 6,620 5,080 6,090
W 241 1 1/2 3 18,320 14,630 11,580 9,180 7,410 6,270 5,930 4,310
W 242 2 1 19,100 19,100 19,100 19,100 16,650 13,800 10,010 8,770
W 243 2 1 1/2 19,100 19,100 19,010 15,480 12,580 10,330 7,730 7,050
W 244 2 2 19,100 18,600 15,020 12,090 9,790 8,140 6,740 5,980
W 245 2 2 1/2 18,770 15,160 12,180 9,840 8,150 7,090 6,880 7,300
W 246 2 3 15,820 12,810 10,430 8,690 7,590 7,130 6,210 5,290

*See figure 47, page 118

( ( ( ( ) (
Speed in RPM = 88364 + D × ( −25203)) + T × ( −21562)) + O × ( −20484)) + D 2 × 4192 + T 2 × 2093 + )
(O 2
) 1  1 
× 1277 + (D × T × 1575) + (D × O × 2681) + (T × O × 2392) +  × 1563 +  × 1405
D  T 

Please note that No speed shall exceed 10,000 SFPM, even if calculations show higher and no speed can increase
as overhang increases. In rare cases calculated RPM may result in negative or illogical speeds (due to inconsis-
tences in ordinal data), do not use the formula when this occurs.

129
ANSI B7.1-2000

3" 3" 3"

5" 4 4 4
8 3"
5"
16 8

5" 1" 1" 7" 7"

8 2 4 32 16 3"
8

B-41 B-42 B-43 B-44 B-51 B-52

3"
5" 1" 16
8 5" 8
16 3"
8

3" 1" 5" 3"

5" 4
16 4 2 8

B-53 B-61 B-62 B-71 B-81

5"
8
3"
1" 1" 8
4 4

1" 1" 1" 1"

2 4 8 8

B-91 B-92 B-96 B-97

11"
16 3"
16

5" 5"
8 8

B-101 B-103

11" 1"
3" 16 2
8

5" 7" 3"

16 16 8 1" 3"
2 8

B-104 B-111 B-112 B-121 B-122

3" 1" 1" 1" 1"

16 8 2 2 3" 2
8

1" 3" 3" 1"

2 8 8 4

B-123 B-124 B-131 B-132 B-133 B-135

Illustration 84 – Mounted wheels

standard shapes
group “B”

130
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 31 – Group B — (shaped wheels) Maximum operating speeds (RPM) for 3/32" mandrels

D T Overhang — Dimension O*
1/2"
Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. Mdls. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Inches Inches
B 43 1/4 5/16 71,540 41,520 28,780 20,350 13,650
B 44 7/32 3/8 70,170 40,630 28,370 20,410 14,190
B 45 3/16 5/16 75,330 44,730 31,400 22,380 15,090
B 46 1/8 5/16 79,130 47,940 34,020 24,410 16,530
B 47 1/8 5/32 85,900 52,780 36,930 25,400 15,590
B 53 1/4 5/8 54,280 28,120 19,230 14,660 11,810
B 55 1/8 1/4 81,840 49,880 35,180 24,800 16,150
B 63 1/4 3/16 78,440 46,890 32,600 22,630 14,390
B 64 1/4 1/16 85,340 52,250 36,420 24,910 15,130
B 65 1/8 1/8 87,260 53,750 37,520 25,600 15,400
B 70 3/4 1/8 50,930 32,820 22,480 16,470 12,170
B 71 5/8 1/8 61,120 37,000 25,490 18,290 12,820
B 72 1/2 1/8 71,150 41,190 28,500 20,120 13,470
B 73 1/2 1/8 71,150 41,190 28,500 20,120 13,470
B 74 7/32 3/32 84,860 51,860 36,120 24,700 15,010
B 81 3/4 3/16 50,930 27,170 17,600 12,360 8,840
B 82 1/2 1/4 61,280 32,860 21,710 14,870 9,760
B 83 3/8 3/16 72,330 41,960 28,850 20,060 13,000
B 84 5/16 3/16 75,380 44,420 30,730 21,350 13,700
B 92 1/4 1/4 74,990 44,210 30,690 21,490 14,020
B 93 3/16 3/16 81,490 49,350 34,470 23,920 15,080
B 94 11/64 3/32 86,740 53,290 37,110 25,250 15,110
B 95 1/8 3/16 84,550 51,820 36,350 25,200 15,780
B 96 1/8 1/4 81,840 49,880 35,180 24,800 16,150
B 97 1/8 3/8 76,420 46,000 32,850 24,010 16,900
B 98 3/32 1/4 83,550 51,300 36,310 25,630 16,680
B 104 5/16 3/8 63,920 35,270 23,880 16,820 11,480
B 105 1/4 1/4 74,990 44,210 30,690 21,490 14,020
B 106 1/8 7/64 87,930 54,240 37,810 25,700 15,310
B 112 3/8 1/2 51,360 24,840 15,590 10,660 7,450
B 113 1/4 1/4 74,990 44,210 30,690 21,490 14,020
B 114 7/32 3/8 70,170 40,630 28,370 20,410 14,190
B 115 3/32 1/8 88,600 54,800 38,270 26,050 15,560
B 122 3/8 3/8 59,750 31,690 20,890 14,420 9,670
B 123 3/16 3/16 81,490 49,350 34,470 23,920 15,080
B 124 1/8 1/8 87,260 53,750 37,520 25,600 15,400
*See figure 47, page 118

( ( (
Speed in RPM = 55083 + D × ( −40520)) + T × ( −43791)) + O × ( −20651)) +

(D × T × (−95028)) + (D × O × 18890) + (T × O × 24663) +  O1 × 25900

Please note that No speed shall exceed 10,000 SFPM, even if calculations show higher and no speed can increase
as overhang increases. In rare cases calculated RPM may result in negative or illogical speeds (due to inconsis-
tences in ordinal data), do not use the formula when this occurs.

131
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 32 – Group B — (shaped wheels) Maximum operating speeds (RPM) for 1/8" mandrels

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
B 41 5/8 5/8 59,560 29,600 16,690 8,040 1,100
B 42 1/2 3/4 61,320 31,360 18,450 9,800 2,860
B 43 1/4 5/16 76,160 46,200 33,290 24,640 17,700
B 44 7/32 3/8 75,840 45,880 32,970 24,320 17,370
B 45 3/16 5/16 79,600 49,650 36,740 28,090 21,140
B 46 1/8 5/16 83,530 53,580 40,670 32,020 25,070
B 47 1/8 5/32 90,160 60,200 47,290 38,640 31,700
B 51 7/16 3/4 62,820 32,860 19,950 11,300 4,360
B 52 3/8 3/4 64,810 34,850 21,940 13,290 6,350
B 53 5/16 5/8 67,070 37,120 24,210 15,560 8,610
B 54 1/4 1/2 71,340 41,390 28,480 19,830 12,880
B 55 1/8 1/4 85,900 55,940 43,030 34,380 27,440
B 61 3/4 5/16 50,930 36,120 23,210 14,560 7,620
B 62 1/2 3/8 65,250 35,300 22,390 13,740 6,790
B 63 1/4 3/16 81,270 51,320 38,410 29,760 22,810
B 64 1/4 1/16 87,910 57,950 45,040 36,390 29,450
B 65 1/8 1/8 91,770 61,820 48,910 40,260 33,310
B 70 3/4 1/8 50,930 44,360 31,450 22,800 15,860
B 71 5/8 1/8 61,120 43,970 31,060 22,410 15,470
B 72 1/2 1/8 75,480 45,520 32,610 23,960 17,020
B 73 1/2 1/8 75,480 45,520 32,610 23,960 17,020
B 74 7/32 3/32 87,770 57,810 44,900 36,250 29,310
B 81 3/4 3/16 50,930 41,240 28,330 19,680 12,730
B 82 1/2 1/4 69,610 39,650 26,740 18,090 11,150
B 83 3/8 3/16 75,840 45,890 32,980 24,330 17,380
B 84 5/16 3/16 77,440 47,480 34,570 25,920 18,980
B 91 1/2 5/8 61,110 31,150 18,240 9,590 2,650
B 92 1/4 1/4 78,530 48,570 35,660 27,010 20,070
B 93 3/16 3/16 84,720 54,760 41,850 33,200 26,260
B 94 11/64 3/32 90,490 60,530 47,620 38,970 32,030
B 95 1/8 3/16 88,650 58,690 45,780 37,130 30,180
B 96 1/8 1/4 85,900 55,940 43,030 34,380 27,440
B 97 1/8 3/8 81,550 51,590 38,680 30,030 23,080
*See figure 47, page 118 (continued)

132
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 32 (concluded)

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Inches Inches Mdls.

B 98 3/32 1/4 88,040 58,090 45,180 36,530 29,580

B 101 5/8 11/16 59,470 29,520 16,610 7,960 1,010
B 102 5/8 1/2 60,870 30,910 18,000 9,350 2,410
B 103 5/8 3/16 61,120 40,850 27,940 19,290 12,340
B 104 5/16 3/8 71,220 41,260 28,350 19,700 12,760
B 105 1/4 1/4 78,530 48,570 35,660 27,010 20,070
B 106 1/8 7/64 92,610 62,660 49,750 41,100 34,150
B 111 7/16 11/16 62,530 32,570 19,660 11,010 4,060
B 112 3/8 1/2 65,910 35,960 23,040 14,400 7,450
B 113 1/4 1/4 78,530 48,570 35,660 27,010 20,070
B 114 7/32 3/8 75,840 45,880 32,970 24,320 17,370
B 115 3/32 1/8 93,920 63,960 51,050 42,400 35,460
B 121 1/2 1/2 62,420 32,460 19,550 10,900 3,960
B 122 3/8 3/8 68,740 38,790 25,880 17,230 10,280
B 123 3/16 3/16 84,720 54,760 41,850 33,200 26,260
B 124 1/8 1/8 91,770 61,820 48,910 40,260 33,310
B 131 1/2 1/2 62,420 32,460 19,550 10,900 3,960
B 132 3/8 1/2 65,910 35,960 23,040 14,400 7,450
B 133 3/8 3/8 68,740 38,790 25,880 17,230 10,280
B 134 5/16 3/8 71,220 41,260 28,350 19,700 12,760
B 135 1/4 1/2 71,340 41,390 28,480 19,830 12,880
B 136 1/4 5/16 76,160 46,200 33,290 24,640 17,700
*See figure 47, page 118

( (
Speed in RPM = 61729 + D × ( −82253)) + T × ( −65232)) +

(O × (−8776)) + (D2 × 62090) + (T 2 × 48654) +  O1 × 25568

Please note that No speed shall exceed 10,000 SFPM, even if calculations show higher and no speed can increase
as overhang increases. In rare cases calculated RPM may result in negative or illogical speeds (due to inconsis-
tences in ordinal data), do not use the formula when this occurs.

133
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 33 – Group B — (shaped wheels) Maximum operating speeds (RPM) for 1/4" mandrels

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Mdls.
Inches Inches
B 41 5/8 5/8 61,120 43,020 33,440 26,840 21,440
B 42 1/2 3/4 69,200 46,720 36,160 28,590 22,200
B 51 7/16 3/4 72,630 49,420 38,130 29,820 22,710
B 52 3/8 3/4 78,340 54,390 42,370 33,320 25,470
B 61 3/4 5/16 50,930 45,120 35,780 29,410 24,240
B 62 1/2 3/8 72,530 48,580 36,540 27,480 19,620
B 71 5/8 1/8 61,120 54,660 43,110 34,530 27,150
B 72 1/2 1/8 76,390 60,370 47,340 37,300 28,450
B 73 1/2 1/8 76,390 60,370 47,340 37,300 28,450
B 91 1/2 5/8 68,200 45,230 34,180 26,110 19,230
B 101 5/8 11/16 61,120 43,940 34,610 28,260 23,100
B 102 5/8 1/2 61,120 42,770 32,690 25,600 19,700
B 111 7/16 11/16 72,090 48,630 37,100 28,540 21,170
B 112 3/8 1/2 80,200 55,270 42,260 32,230 23,390
B 121 1/2 1/2 69,310 45,850 34,300 25,740 18,370
B 131 1/2 1/2 69,310 45,850 34,300 25,740 18,370
B 132 3/8 1/2 80,200 55,270 42,260 32,230 23,390
*See figure 47, page 118

( ( (
Speed in RPM = 19062 + T × ( −116851)) + O × ( −26865)) + T 2 × 67551 + )
(D × O × 23507) +   1 
1
× 17881 + (D × T × 56029) +  × 23799 + (T × O × 7894)
O  D 

Please note that No speed shall exceed 10,000 SFPM, even if calculations show higher and no speed can increase
as overhang increases. In rare cases calculated RPM may result in negative or illogical speeds (due to inconsis-
tences in ordinal data), do not use the formula when this occurs.

134
 ANSI B7.1-2000

2 3"
2 1" 4
2

2"

1 1" 1 1"
4 8

3" 3" 7"

4 1" 1 1" 4 8
4

A-1 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-11

1 1" 1 1" 1 1" 1" 1"

4 8 7" 16
8 3"
4

11" 11" 1" 3" 1"

16 1 1" 16 4 1" 4 4
8

A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 A-21 A-23 A-24

1"

5" 3"
8 8

1 1"
2
5" 1 3"
1" 8 1"
8

A-25 A-26 A-31 A-32 A-34

1"
3" 3" 3"
8 8 1" 4
4
1" 1 5" 1 1" 1" 3"
8 4 4

A-35 A-36 A-37 A-38 A-39

Illustration 85 – Mounted wheels

standard shapes
group “A”

135
ANSI B7.1-2000
Table 34 – Group A — (shaped wheels) Maximum operating speeds (RPM) for 1/4" mandrels

D T 1/2" Overhang — Dimension O*

Shape Wheel Wheel Overhang
No. Diameter Thickness & Thd. 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3
Mdls.
Inches Inches
A 1 3/4 2 1/2 20,960 16,100 13,030 10,400 7,950 5,580
A 2 1 1 1/4 32,420 26,190 21,740 17,730 13,910 10,170
A 3 1 2 3/4 15,530 11,940 10,130 8,770 7,590 6,500
A 4 1 1/4 1 1/4 28,550 23,150 19,530 16,350 13,360 10,450
A 5 3/4 1 1/8 38,550 31,270 25,770 20,720 15,840 11,060
A 6 3/4 1 1/8 38,550 31,270 25,770 20,720 15,840 11,060
A 11 7/8 2 25,420 20,100 16,550 13,460 10,540 7,710
A 12 11/16 1 1/4 38,050 30,790 25,300 20,260 15,400 10,620
A 13 1 1/8 1 1/8 31,850 25,810 21,560 17,750 14,120 10,570
A 14 11/16 7/8 43,440 35,510 29,370 23,660 18,140 12,710
A 15 1/4 1 50,510 41,470 34,200 27,380 20,730 14,180
A 21 1 1 35,510 28,840 23,950 19,510 15,240 11,060
A 22 3/4 5/8 46,120 37,960 31,580 25,640 19,890 14,220
A 23 3/4 1 40,300 32,800 27,080 21,800 16,710 11,700
A 24 1/4 3/4 56,000 46,400 38,580 31,210 24,010 16,910
A 25 1 1 35,510 28,840 23,950 19,510 15,240 11,060
A 26 5/8 5/8 48,980 40,410 33,610 27,260 21,090 15,010
A 31 1 3/8 1 27,780 23,970 20,330 17,130 14,100 11,170
A 32 1 5/8 38,200 33,480 27,930 22,820 17,900 13,060
A 33 1 1/2 38,200 35,460 29,690 24,370 19,220 14,160
A 34 1 1/2 3/8 25,460 25,460 25,460 21,870 18,160 14,540
A 35 1 3/8 38,200 38,030 32,040 26,500 21,130 15,850
A 36 1 5/8 3/8 23,510 23,510 23,510 21,070 17,770 14,570
A 37 1 1/4 1/4 30,560 30,560 30,560 27,320 22,560 17,890
A 38 1 1 35,510 28,840 23,950 19,510 15,240 11,060
A 39 3/4 3/4 44,030 36,090 29,930 24,220 18,680 13,230
*See figure 47, page 118

( ( ( (
Speed in RPM = 75779 + D × ( −35963)) + T × ( −17945)) + O × ( −18155)) + T 2 × 4542 + )
(D × T × 5561) + (D × O × 6633) + (T × O × 3524) +   1 
1
× 2672 +  × 2193
O  T 

Please note that No speed shall exceed 10,000 SFPM, even if calculations show higher and no speed can increase
as overhang increases. In rare cases calculated RPM may result in negative or illogical speeds (due to inconsis-
tences in ordinal data), do not use the formula when this occurs.

136
 Table 35 – Conversion Table — Wheel Speeds
Revolutions per minute for various diameters of abrasive wheels to give surface speed in feet per minute as indicated

Diam- Surface Speed in Feet per Minute Diam-

eter of eter of
Wheel 4,000 4,500 5,000 5,500 6,000 6,500 7,000 7,500 8,000 8,500 9,000 9,500 10,000 12,000 12,500 14,200 16,000 16,500 17,000 Wheel
in in
Inches Revolutions per Minute Revolutions per Minute Revolutions per Minute Revolutions per Minute Revolutions per Minute Inches
1 15,279 17,189 19,099 21,008 22,918 24,828 26,737 28,647 30,558 32,467 34,377 36,287 38,197 45,837 47,746 54,240 61,115 63,025 64,935 1
1 1/2 10,186 11,459 12,732 14,006 15,279 16,552 17,825 19,099 20,372 21,645 22,918 24,192 25,465 30,558 31,831 36,160 40,744 42,017 43,290 1 1/2
2 7,639 8,594 9,549 10,504 11,459 12,414 13,369 14,324 15,279 16,234 17,189 18,144 19,099 22,918 23,873 27,120 30,558 31,513 32,468 2
2 1/2 6,112 6,875 7,639 8,403 9,167 9,931 10,695 11,459 12,223 12,987 13,751 14,515 15,279 18,335 19,099 21,696 24,446 25,210 25,974 2 1/2
3 5,093 5,730 6,366 7,003 7,639 8,276 8,913 9,549 10,186 10,823 11,459 12,096 12,732 15,279 15,915 18,080 20,372 21,008 21,645 3
3 1/2 4,365 4,911 5,457 6,002 6,548 7,094 7,639 8,185 8,731 9,276 9,822 10,368 10,913 13,096 13,642 15,497 17,462 18,007 18,553 3 1/2
4 3,820 4,297 4,775 5,252 5,730 6,207 6,685 7,162 7,640 8,117 8,594 9,072 9,549 11,459 11,937 13,560 15,279 15,756 16,234 4
5 3,056 3,438 3,820 1,202 4,584 1,966 5,348 5,730 6,112 6,494 6,875 7,257 7,639 9,167 9,549 10,848 12,223 12,605 12,987 5
6 2,546 2,865 3,183 3,501 3,820 4,138 4,465 4,775 5,093 5,411 5,730 6,048 6,366 7,639 7,958 9,040 10,186 10,504 10,823 6
7 2,183 2,456 2,728 3,001 3,274 3,547 3,820 4,093 4,365 4,638 4,911 5,184 5,457 6,548 6,821 7,749 8,731 9,004 9,276 7
8 1,910 2,149 2,387 2,626 2,865 3,104 3,342 3,581 3,820 4,058 4,297 4,536 4,775 5,730 5,968 6,780 7,639 7,878 8,117 8
9 1,699 1,910 2,122 2,334 2,546 2,759 2,971 3,183 3,395 3,608 3,820 4,032 4,244 5,093 5,305 6,027 6,791 7,003 7,215 9
10 1,528 1,719 1,910 2,101 2,292 2,483 2,674 2,865 3,056 3,247 3,438 3,629 3,820 4,584 4,775 5,424 6,112 6,303 6,494 10
12 1,273 1,432 1,592 1,751 1,910 2,069 2,228 2,387 2,546 2,706 2,865 3,024 3,180 3,820 3,979 4,520 5,093 5,252 5,411 12
14 1,091 1,228 1,364 1,501 1,637 1,773 1,910 2,046 2,183 2,319 2,456 2,592 2,728 3,274 3,410 3,874 4,365 4,502 4,638 14
16 955 1,074 1,194 1,313 1,432 1,552 1,671 1,790 1,910 2,029 2,149 2,268 2,387 2,865 2,984 3,390 3,820 3,939 4,058 16
18 849 955 1,061 1,167 1,273 1,379 1,485 1,592 1,698 1,804 1,910 2,016 2,122 2,546 2,653 3,013 3,395 3,501 3,608 18
20 764 859 955 1,050 1,146 1,241 1,337 1,432 1,528 1,623 1,719 1,814 1,910 2,292 2,387 2,712 3,056 3,151 3,247 20
22 694 781 868 955 1,042 1,129 1,215 1,302 1,389 1,476 1,563 1,649 1,736 2,083 2,170 2,465 2,778 2,865 2,952 22
24 637 716 796 875 955 1,035 1,114 1,194 1,273 1,353 1,432 1,512 1,592 1,910 1,989 2,260 2,546 2,625 2,706 24
26 588 661 735 808 881 955 1,028 1,102 1,175 1,249 1,322 1,396 1,469 1,763 1,836 2,086 2,351 2,424 2,498 26
28 546 614 682 750 819 887 955 1,023 1,091 1,160 1,228 1,290 1,364 1,637 1,705 1,937 2,183 2,251 2,319 28
30 509 573 637 700 764 828 891 955 1,019 1,082 1,146 1,210 1,273 1,528 1,592 1,808 2,037 2,101 2,165 30
32 477 537 597 657 716 776 836 895 955 1,015 1,074 1,134 1,194 1,432 1,492 1,695 1,910 1,970 2,029 32
34 449 506 562 618 674 780 786 843 899 955 1,011 1,067 1,123 1,348 1,404 1,595 1,798 1,854 1,910 34
36 424 477 531 584 637 690 743 796 849 902 955 1,008 1,061 1,273 1,326 1,507 1,698 1,751 1,804 36
38 402 452 503 553 603 653 704 754 804 854 905 955 1,005 1,206 1,256 1,427 1,608 1,659 1,709 38
40 382 430 477 525 573 621 668 716 764 812 859 907 956 1,146 1,194 1,356 1,528 1,576 1,623 40
42 364 409 455 500 546 591 637 682 728 773 819 864 909 1,091 1,137 1,291 1,455 1,500 1,546 42
44 347 391 434 477 521 564 608 651 694 738 781 825 868 1,042 1,085 1,233 1,389 1,432 1,476 42
46 332 374 415 457 498 540 581 623 664 706 747 789 830 996 1,038 1,179 1,329 1,370 1,412 46
48 318 358 398 438 477 517 557 597 637 676 716 756 796 955 995 1,130 1,273 1,313 1,353 48
53 288 324 360 396 432 468 504 540 577 613 649 685 721 865 901 1,023 1,153 1,189 1,225 53
60 255 286 318 350 382 414 446 477 509 541 573 605 637 764 796 904 1,019 1,050 1,082 60
72 212 239 265 292 318 345 371 398 424 461 477 504 531 637 663 753 849 875 902 72

Note: "Centrifugal Force," which is the force that tends to rupture a given wheel when overspeeding, increases as the square of the
velocity of that wheel. For example, the centrifugal force in a wheel running at 5,500 surface feet per minute is 49 percent greater
than in the same wheel running at 4,500 surface feet per minute, although the speed is actually only 22 percent greater.
ANSI B7.1-2000

137
ANSI B7.1-2000
Annex A
(informative)

A.1 Introduction
While not part of this Standard, the following relates a number of factors which contribute to the
safe operation of abrasive wheels. Safety is everyone’s business.

A.2 General requirements

Abrasive wheels should be used with operator safety in mind and in conjunction with the type of
protective devices most effective for each application.

A.3 Classes of protection devices

There are two main classes of protection devices: those that protect the operator, and those that
provide protection to others in the work area.
A.3.1 Operator protection devices
A.3.1.1 Safety guards
The most positive way to protect the operator as well as others in the immediate area is by
guarding the wheel effectively. Section 4 (Safety Guards), page 50, explains the provisions
necessary for adequate guarding. A guard protects the operator either by containing or deflecting
the pieces of an accidentally broken wheel. Guards also control sparks and swarf.
A.3.1.2 Safety goggles, spectacles and face shields
Because the grinding operation produces sparks and swarf, eye protection is of the utmost
importance. Safety goggles or safety spectacles must be worn at all times in the grinding area.
Dust masks and face shields may be required as well. (See ANSI Z87.1 Practice for Occupational
and Educational Eye and Face Protection.)
A.3.1.3 Protective clothing
Safety aprons, gloves, safety shoes, and other protective clothing should be worn as required by
the nature of the grinding operation. Well designed protective clothing will allow the operator to
work more efficiently and safely.
A.3.1.4 Dust protection
Dust masks may be required in an extremely dusty or contaminated environment.
A.3.2 Work area protection
A.3.2.1 Barriers
In some operations, partitions, walls, or separate grinding booths will provide protection to other
people nearby.
A.3.2.2 Exhaust systems
Adequate ventilation and swarf removal should be provided in the grinding area.

138
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Annex B
(informative)

A guide to grinding wheel guard design

B.1 The method used to calculate guard dimensions

Force expected to be withstood by guard is:

F = WrC
F = Centrifugal force in pounds
Where:
W = Weight of wheel in pounds
r = Radius of wheel in inches
C = Constant = 0.0000284N 2
N = Speed of wheel in revolutions per minute

Assumptions
1. Hole size as indicated in table
2. Half of wheel hits guard
3. Impact occurs at a point
4. Wheel density = .1 lb/in 3
5. Guard is stressed across diameter
6. Guard is same diameter as wheel

Safety factors
Safety factor (SF) is
SF = a x b x c
Where:
a = the ratio of ultimate strength to elastic limit
For steel and cast iron or cast steel, a = 2.
b = the character of the stress
For a load varying from zero to maximum with impact, b varies from 1 1/ 2 to 2.
c = the material constant
For steel, c = 1; for cast materials, c = 2.
Therefore, for cast materials the acceptable safety factor varies from 6 to 8. For steel it varies
from 3 to 4.
The higher safety factor is used for wheels 8" or less in thickness because the wheel is most likely
to break as in the assumptions. Thicker wheels are less likely to fly apart in complete sections
and are more able to withstand side pressure. A lower safety factor is therefore applied.
The force of impact, F, the safety factor, SF, and cross-sectional area, A, of the side member are
used to calculate the stress in the side member and compare this to the tensile strength of the
material.
D = diameter of side member, inches (same as wheel per assumption 6 above)
h = hole diameter in guard to accommodate arbor, inches

139
ANSI B7.1-2000
t = thickness of side member, inches
A = area of side member(s), square inches
S = stress in side member due to impact. This is equivalent to the minimum tensile strength
of the material.

Example:
What is the minimum thickness of the fixed side member for a 30 x 2 x 12 wheel operating at
14,000 SFPM.
Assume all stress is taken by the fixed side member, and it is stressed across its diameter per
assumption 5, and has a hole for the arbor of 5 inches.
Assume it is made of steel with a tensile strength of 55,000 psi.
14,000 SFPM is equivalent to 1782 rpm for a 30" diameter wheel.
The weight of this size wheel at the stated density is 119 pounds.

Safety factors:
a = 2
b = 1.5
c = 1
SF = a x b x c
SF = 2 x 1.5 x 1 = 3

W = 119 pounds
r = 30/2 = 15
C = 0.0000284 x N 2
C = 0.0000284 x 1782 2 = 90.18

F = WrC
F = 119 x 15 x 90.18 = 160,971

First trial:
Assume a thickness for the side member.
t = 1/4 inch
Then the cross-sectional area of the fixed side member is:

A = (D − h) × t
A = (30 − 5) × 1/ 4 = 6.25 in2

(If the removable side member shares some of the load then appropriate
adjustments can be made in the area.)

The stress, S, in the side member due to impact from half the wheel is then:

S=
(SF) × F = 3 × 160, 971 = 77, 266 psi
A 6.25

Since this value is higher than the stated tensile strength of the steel,
choose a larger thickness of side member and rerun the calculation.

140
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Second trial:
Increase the side member thickness to 3/8 inch.

A = (30 − 5) × 3 / 8 = 9.38 in2

3 × 160, 971
S= = 51, 483 psi
9.38

Since this value of stress is lower than the stated tensile strength of the steel,
this thickness would be adequate to withstand the forces as calculated.

B.2 Safety guard systems for abrasive wheels

The current edition of ANSI B7.1 includes specifications for safety guard design as preceding
editions have done. These specifications are based on careful calculation of the forces that the
safety guard must withstand when an abrasive wheel is accidentally broken. A test method for
guards used on portable electric grinders is outlined in Section 4.2.4.1.1.
As grinding technology has progressed, special abrasive wheel speeds have become more
common. Guard design based on calculations alone may be less reliable when the increased
energies of special speed are involved. Therefore, development of more efficient grinding
processes has been accompanied by improvements in safety guard design and testing.
The safety guard developments include mechanisms which react very quickly to an accident and
the guard becomes a total enclosure in time to contain all significant debris. Among other
developments are energy absorption devices combined with proper enclosure design to contain
broken wheel fragments. Guard test methods generally involve breaking a rotating abrasive wheel
within the guard by either impact of a bullet or detonation of an explosive at the wheel bore.
Several safety guard designs and test methods have been reported in both European and
American literature.
Since grinding technology is nearing the point where it will not be feasible to include guard design
standards in the “Safety Requirements for the Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive Wheels,” it
is considered necessary for future editions to include performance criteria for safety guards. The
performance criteria will be applicable to all grinding conditions, and specific design standards
will not be necessary.
The following is an example of the characteristics which should be considered in defining safety
guard performance criteria. It is expected that the performance criteria in future safety standards
will be similar to this example. In the meantime, machine builders may find the example, with
properly selected safety factors and other values, a useful guide to safety guard design. The
example may be particularly valuable in the special conditions where current safety standard
design specifications are not applicable. It may also be helpful in situations when it is desirable
to deviate from Safety standard specifications and proof of the efficacy of the modified design is
necessary.

B.3 An example of performance characteristics of a guarding system

Outlined below is an example of performance characteristics and test method for guarding
systems used on fixed base grinding machines utilizing abrasive wheels which are 12" and
greater in diameter and 1" and greater in width. This is presented only as an example which might
be used in design of a guarding system and is not to be interpreted as the only suitable criteria

141
ANSI B7.1-2000
for the design of such guarding systems. For guards used on portable electric grinders, see
Section 4.2.4.1.1.
A. Test Method
(1) The kinetic energy of a full size wheel rotating at maximum approved operating speed
for the machine shall be multiplied by the selected safety factor to determine the
kinetic energy of the wheel at burst. (E = 1/ 2 Iw 2, where E is kinetic energy, I is mass
moment of inertia, and w is angular velocity.)
(2) Wheel head position, truing device position, and workpiece choice (or no workpiece)
shall be chosen to represent the conditions in which the guarding system is expected
to be least effective during normal machine use.
(3) Performance characteristics of guard system shall be determined by deliberately
bursting a wheel which is rotating at the speed which provides the energy level
required to meet the selected safety factor.
B. Performance Characteristics
(1) The maximum kinetic energy of any single escaping fragment shall not exceed a
preselected limit.
(2) The maximum kinetic energy of any single fragment entering the zone normally
occupied by operator’s head shall not exceed the impact strength of safety glasses
conforming to ANSI Z87.1 standard.
(3) All machine components shall remain attached to the machine and shall not move or
rotate across any zone normally occupied by an operator.
Much of the initial kinetic energy of fragments is dissipated through impacts and ricochet before
escape from some types of guarding systems. Therefore, the example performance characteris-
tics are excessively stringent if theoretical kinetic energies of escape fragments are calculated
from the peripheral speed of the grinding wheel before breakage.
One way of determining actual kinetic energy of escape fragments is to determine trajectories
from high speed moving pictures of the test and calculate the energies from weights, final
locations and trajectories of individual particles.

142
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Annex C
(informative)

ANSI B186.1-1984, Safety Code for Portable Air Tools, lists several tables of wheel types and
dimensions appropriate for use on portable air driven grinders. While not part of ANSI B7.1-2000,
these tables have been reproduced below for the convenience of the reader. (See Section 1.5
in ANSI B7.1 and Section 3.2.11 in ANSI B186.1.)

Table C-1
Type 1 Abrasive Wheels for
Portable Air Grinders

GRINDING
SURFACE T

D T H
Vitrified Bonds — 6500 SFPM or less
Organic Bonds — 9500 SFPM or less
2 or less (50) 1/2 (13) 1/4 (6)
2 or less (50) 1/2 (13) 3/8 (10)
Organic Bonds—9500 SFPM Or Less
3 or less (75) 1/2 (13) 3/4 (10)
3 (75) 1/2 (13) 1/2 (13)
4 (100) 3/4 (20) 1/2 (13)
4 (100) 1 (25) 5/8 (16)
6 (150) 1 (25) 5/8 (16)
8 (200) 1 (25) 5/8 (16)
Organic Bonds—Over 9500 SFPM
2 or less (50) 1/2 (13) 1/4 (6)
2 or less (50) 1/2 (13) 3/8 (10)
3 (75) 1/2 (13) 3/8 (10)
4 (100) 1 (25) 1 (25)
6 (150) 1 (25) 1 (25)
8 (200) 1 (25) 1 (25)
Dimensions are Inches.
Approximate Millimeter Equivalent Shown in ( ).

143
ANSI B7.1-2000

Table C-2
Type 6 and Type 11 Abrasive Wheels for
Portable Air Grinders

D
D GRINDING W 3/4" MIN.
SURFACE
GRINDING
W 3/4" MIN.
SURFACE

T
T
E E

H H
J

D H T W E J

Organic Bonds — 9500 SFPM or less (type 6 and type 11)

4 (100) 5/8-11 UNC-2B 2 (50) 3/4 (20) 3/4 (20) 3 (75)
5 (125) 5/8-11 UNC-2B 2 (50) 1 (25) 3/4 (20) 3 3/4 (95)
6 (150) 5/8-11 UNC-2B 2 (50) 1 1/2 (40) 3/4 (20) 4 3/4 (120)
Organic Bonds — 12,500 SFPM (type 11 only)
4 (100) 5/8-18 UNF-2B 2 (50) 3/4 (20) 3/4 (20) 3 (75)
5 (125) 3/4-16 UNF-2B 2 (50) 1 (25) 3/4 (20) 3 3/4 (95)
6 (150) 7/8-14 UNF-2B 2 (50) 1 1/2 (40) 3/4 (20) 4 3/4 (120)
Dimensions are Inches.
Approximate Millimeter Equivalent Shown in ( ).

144
 ANSI B7.1-2000

Table C-3

Type 27 Depressed Center Abrasive Wheels

for Portable Air Grinders
D
U
CUTTING K
SURFACE

H
U=E Y E
O

D U&E H O K Y

Organic Bonds Only — 14,200 SFPM

3 (80) 1/8 (3.2) 1/4 (6) 3/8 (9.5) 5/32 (4) 3/4 (20) 1 5/16 (34)

4 (100) 1/8 (3.2) 1/4 (6) 3/8 (9.5) 5/32 (4) 3/4 (20) 1 5/16 (34)

4 (100) 1/8 (3.2) 1/4 (6) 5/8 (15.9) 11/64 (4.6) 1 3/32 (28) 2 3/64 (52)

7 (180) 1/8 (3.2) 1/4 (6) 7/8 (22.2) 3/16 (5) 1 5/8 (42) 2 5/8 (68)

9 (230) 1/8 (3.2) 1/4 (6) 7/8 (22.2) 3/16 (5) 1 5/8 (42) 2 5/8 (68)
Dimensions are Inches.
Approximate Millimeter Equivalent Shown in ( ).

Table C-4

Type 28 Depressed Center Abrasive Wheels

for Portable Air Grinders
D
U
GRINDING K
SURFACE

H V1
E O
Y
U=E
J

D U&E H O K Y P V1
Organic Bonds Only — 14,200 SFPM
7 (180) 1/4 (6) 7/8 (22.2) 3/16 (5) 1 5/8 (42) 2 5/8 (68) 4 (100) 15°
9 (230) 1/4 (6) 7/8 (22.2) 3/16 (5) 1 5/8 (42) 2 5/8 (68) 4 (100) 15°
Dimensions are Inches.
Approximate Millimeter Equivalent Shown in ( ).

145
ANSI B7.1-2000

Index

A
Abrasive disc wheels ............................................................ 16–17, 79, 99
mounting ........................................................................... 39–40, 94
Abrasive flap disc wheels ...................................................... 23
Abrasive wheel ...................................................................... 1, 89
Portable air grinding machines ......................................... 26
Acceptance of shipment ........................................................ 27
Actuating controls ................................................................. 1
Adaptor .................................................................................. 90, 96
Adaptor flanges ..................................................................... 76, 78, 83, 84, 85, 86
Adjustable guard ................................................................... 36
Adjustable tongue spark arrestor .......................................... 58, 59, 61
Airborne contaminants .......................................................... 49
control ............................................................................... 109
Anchor mounted discs .......................................................... 16
Arbor ..................................................................................... 1
Arbor hole .............................................................................. See Hole
Assemblies ............................................................................ 3

B
Balance ................................................................................. 77, 112–113
Ball grinding .......................................................................... 12, 100, 101
Band type guard .................................................................... 52, 66, 67, 96
Barrier ................................................................................... 1
shield ................................................................................ 9
Base ...................................................................................... 1
Bench grinder ........................................................................ 12, 32, 57–58, 67, 76–77, 78, 82, 99
Bins, storage ......................................................................... 27, 29
Blade tensioning ................................................................... 1, 102, 106
Blotters .................................................................................. 2, 75, 76, 78–79, 79, 80, 90
Boxes, storage ...................................................................... 27, 29
Burr grinding ......................................................................... 14 See also Grinding: rotary tool (burr)
Bushings ............................................................................... 82, 83
cup back ........................................................................... 52, 83
reducing ............................................................................ 7–8, 90
threaded ........................................................................... 10, 21, 25

C
Camshaft grinding wheels ..................................................... 99
CBN wheel ............................................................................ 79, 100, 102, 107
Center ................................................................................... 2
Centerless O.D. grinding ....................................................... 12, 14, 17, 101
Chuck .................................................................................... 2, 96, 97
collet ................................................................................. 2
Coated abrasive tool ............................................................. 2
Collet ..................................................................................... 2, 38, 95, 118
Component ........................................................................... 2
Compressible washer ........................................................... See Blotters
Concrete saws and sawing ................................................... 12, 64, 73, 102
Cone wheels ......................................................................... 21, 72, 88, 99
Configuration ......................................................................... 2
Contour grinding ................................................................... 12, 114
Control systems .................................................................... 2, 47–48

146
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Controls
actuating ........................................................................... 1
direction ............................................................................ 43–45
foot ................................................................................... 45–46
hand wheel ....................................................................... 45
lever .................................................................................. 44
operator ............................................................................ 2
push button ...................................................................... 44
Conversion table—wheel speeds (SFPM) ............................ 137
Coolant .................................................................................. 2, 49, 113
Corner clearance (‘C’ dimension) .......................................... 17
Cover, movable ..................................................................... 2
Creep feed grinding .............................................................. 12
Cup back bushings ............................................................... See Bushings
Cup wheel ............................................................................. 72
Cup wheel guards ................................................................. 52
Cutting off .............................................................................. 12, 15, 22
Cutting-off wheels ................................................................. 24, 51, 54, 64, 65, 66, 70, 72, 73–74, 74, 79, 82,
89, 90, 99, 102, 106
Cylinder wheels ..................................................................... 18, 72, 79, 96, 99
Cylindrical O.D. grinding ....................................................... 12, 17, 62
work support ..................................................................... 37

D
Definitions ............................................................................. 1–26
Depressed center wheels ..................................................... 22–23, 23
Design ................................................................................... 2
Device ................................................................................... 3
auxiliary ............................................................................ 3
safety ................................................................................ 3
Diameter of spindle ............................................................... 32
Diamond wheel ..................................................................... 79, 89, 90, 99, 100, 102, 107
Direction arrows .................................................................... 33
Discard size ........................................................................... 115–116
Discrete parts ........................................................................ 3
Dish wheels ........................................................................... 20
Double recessed wheels ....................................................... 19
Drawn steel guard ................................................................. 51, 52, 53, 54, 55
Dressing ................................................................................ 3, 109, 113
Driving action ........................................................................ 79
Driving flange ........................................................................ 79–80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85

E
Enclosure, additional ............................................................. 3, 111
Exhaust ................................................................................. 42
Exhaust zone ........................................................................ 3
Eye and face protection ........................................................ 109

F
Fire prevention and protection .............................................. 46
Flanges ................................................................................. 3, 17, 18–26, 23, 25, 26, 33, 35, 38–39, 51, 72–81,
90, 91, 96, 98, 110
adaptor ............................................................................. 76, 78, 83, 84, 85, 86
design ............................................................................... 76
dimensions ....................................................................... 76
driving ............................................................................... 79–80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86
maintenance ..................................................................... 80

147
ANSI B7.1-2000
material ............................................................................. 76
multiple screw ................................................................... 84, 86
repair ................................................................................ 80
sleeve adaptor .................................................................. 76, 78, 84, 86
straight .............................................................................. 75
straight relieved ................................................................ 3, 78, 81, 82
straight unrelieved ............................................................ 3, 21, 25, 38, 72, 74, 83
test .................................................................................... 76–77, 78
Flaring cup wheels ................................................................ 19
Floorstand grinder ................................................................. 12–13, 35, 59–61, 85
Flute grinding wheels ............................................................ 99
Form grinding ........................................................................ 114

G
General operating rules ........................................................ 109–116
Grind cycle ............................................................................ 3
Grinder
angle ................................................................................. 52, 53
bench grinder ................................................................... 32, 57–58, 67, 76–77, 78, 82, 99
cylindrical .......................................................................... 62
floorstand .......................................................................... 12–13, 35, 59–61, 85
mechanical ....................................................................... 99
offhand ............................................................................. 114
pedestal ............................................................................ 57–58, 67, 76–77, 78
portable ............................................................................ 26, 51–56, 53–56, 54, 70, 76–77, 78, 95, 99, 118
stationary .......................................................................... 42–49, 57–69, 66, 70
surface .............................................................................. 62
swing frame ...................................................................... 63, 85, 99
vertical .............................................................................. 52, 53
Grinding
ball grinding ...................................................................... 100, 101
camshaft ........................................................................... 99
centerless O.D. ................................................................. 101
contour ............................................................................. 114
cylindrical O.D. ................................................................. 17
work support ................................................................ 37
form .................................................................................. 114
internal .............................................................................. 99
machine
design .......................................................................... 31
maintenance ................................................................ 31
operator's responsibility ............................................... 31
owner responsibility ..................................................... 31
supplier's responsibility ................................................ 31
user responsibility ........................................................ 31
off-hand
work support ................................................................ 37
precision ........................................................................... 86, 112, 114
rotary tool (burr) ................................................................ 65
shoulder ............................................................................ 114
side ................................................................................... 74, 113–114
surface .............................................................................. 16–26, 99
tool .................................................................................... 43, 99
top .................................................................................... 63
wet .................................................................................... 113
Grinding face ......................................................................... 4
Grinding machine .................................................................. 3
Grinding surface .................................................................... 4
Grinding wheel ...................................................................... 1

148
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Guard .................................................................................... 4 See also Safety guard
adjustable barrier ............................................................. 4
band type ......................................................................... 52
drawn steel ....................................................................... 51, 52, 53, 54
exposure adjustment ........................................................ 58, 59
exposure angles ............................................................... 57–65
fixed barrier ...................................................................... 4
interlocked ........................................................................ 4
self-closing ....................................................................... 60–61
steel construction guide ................................................... 69

H
Handling ................................................................................ 27, 87, 108
Hazard ................................................................................... 4
Hazardous motion ................................................................. 4
Headstock ............................................................................. 4
Holes ..................................................................................... 7, 17, 33, 39, 41, 75, 76, 78, 90, 91, 92,
93–94, 115
Honing tools .......................................................................... 4, 43
Humidity ................................................................................ 27, 28
Hydraulic pressure protection ............................................... 46–47

I
Inorganic bonded wheels ...................................................... 5, 17, 25, 76, 99, 115
Inserted nut disc .................................................................... 39–40, 72, 79, 88, 94
Inserted washer disc ............................................................. 39–40, 72, 79, 94
Inspection .............................................................................. 87–89, 108, 109
Installer .................................................................................. 5
Integrator ............................................................................... 5
Interlock ................................................................................. 5
Internal grinding .................................................................... 13, 50, 99
Internal wheel ........................................................................ 72, 77, 79

L
Lapidary ................................................................................ 13, 50
Large hole inorganic bonded wheels .................................... 115
Lighting ................................................................................. 47
Limitations of wheel shapes .................................................. 16–26
Loading ................................................................................. 46
Lubrication ............................................................................ 114

M
Machine builder ..................................................................... 98, 105–106, 107
Machine conversions ............................................................ 116
Machine cycle ....................................................................... 5
Machine face plate ................................................................ 39, 40, 41, 96
Machine maintenance ........................................................... 114
Machine manufacturer .......................................................... 5
Machine spindle
rotation ............................................................................. 33–35
thread ............................................................................... 33
Machine supplier ................................................................... 5
Machine user ........................................................................ 16, 106
Maintenance ......................................................................... 5
Mandrel ................................................................................. 117, 118
Manufacturer ......................................................................... 5, 105, 106, 109
Masonry saws and cutting .................................................... 13, 64, 73, 102

149
ANSI B7.1-2000
Mechanical grinder ................................................................ 99
Mechanism ............................................................................ 6
Metal bonded wheels ............................................................ 5, 24, 99, 102
Metal centers ......................................................................... 24, 50, 89, 107
Modification ........................................................................... 6
Modifier ................................................................................. 6
Mount design
abrasive discs ................................................................... 39–40
plate mounted type discs ................................................. 41
Mount down .......................................................................... 6
Mount up ............................................................................... 6
Mounted wheels .................................................................... 25, 72, 79, 88, 95, 100, 101, 102, 106, 107,
117–118, 118
Mounting ............................................................................... 16–17, 39–40, 41, 78, 79–80, 87–97, 109, 116
multiple screw ................................................................... 84, 86, 93
nut .................................................................................... 33, 91–93
screws .............................................................................. 91–93
Multiple screw flange ............................................................ 84, 86, 93
Multiple screw mounting ....................................................... 84, 86
Multiple wheel mounting ....................................................... 79–80

N
Noise ..................................................................................... 49
Normal operation .................................................................. 6
Nose, spindle ........................................................................ 6

O
Off-hand grinding .................................................................. 13
work support ..................................................................... 37
Offhand grinder ..................................................................... 114
Operator ................................................................................ 6
Organic bonded wheels ........................................................ 6, 8, 22, 24, 25, 29, 74, 83, 85, 96, 99, 101,
107, 113

P
Pedestal grinder .................................................................... 13, 57–58, 67, 76–77, 78
Peripheral member ............................................................... 7
Personal protective equipment ............................................. 109
Personnel .............................................................................. 7
instructed .......................................................................... 7
skilled ............................................................................... 7
Pin, drive ............................................................................... 7
Pistol grip pneumatic sander ................................................. 14
Plate mounted discs .............................................................. 17, 72, 79, 88, 94–95, 99, 100, 101, 102, 106, 107
mount design .................................................................... 41
Plug wheels ........................................................................... 21, 88, 99
Pneumatic pressure protection ............................................. 46–47
Point of operation .................................................................. 7
Portable grinders ................................................................... 25, 26, 37–39, 53–56, 54, 76–77, 78, 95, 118
Portable grinding ................................................................... 51–56, 70, 99
Portable, hand held tools ...................................................... 91
Portable saws ....................................................................... 15, 73, 82
Portable wheel ...................................................................... 72
Power .................................................................................... 42, 42–43, 47–48
Precision grinding ................................................................. 14, 86, 112, 114
Pressure ................................................................................ 114, 118
Projecting stud type discs ..................................................... 17, 18, 39–40, 88, 94

150
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Projecting studs .................................................................... 72, 79
Prong anchor bushing ........................................................... 83
Protective clothing ................................................................. 109

R
Racks, storage ...................................................................... 28–30
Rebuilder ............................................................................... 7
Rebuilding ............................................................................. 7
Recess diameter (‘P’ dimension) .......................................... 17
Recess of flanges ................................................................. 78
Recessed one side wheels ................................................... 18
Recessed wheels .................................................................. 22, 81
Reconstruction ...................................................................... 7
Reconstructor ........................................................................ 7
Reducing bushings ............................................................... 7
Regulating wheel .................................................................. 12, 14, 101
Reinforced wheels ................................................................ 8, 22, 23, 24, 25, 50, 74, 96, 99
Relieved wheels .................................................................... 22
Repair .................................................................................... 8
Resin bonded wheels ............................................................ 6, 102
Responsibility
machine builder's ............................................................. 98, 107
operator ............................................................................ 31
owner ................................................................................ 31
supplier ............................................................................. 31
user .................................................................................. 31, 98, 108, 109
speed adjustment control ............................................ 104
speed check of machines ............................................ 103–104
wheel manufacturer .......................................................... 100–102, 106
Revolutions per minute (RPM) .............................................. 8, 36, 89, 98, 102, 103, 106, 110
Revolving cup guards ........................................................... 52
Ring test ................................................................................ 87–88
Rotary tool (burr) grinding ..................................................... 65
Rotary tool grinding ............................................................... 14
Rubber bonded wheels ......................................................... 6
Run ........................................................................................ 8

S
Safeguarding ......................................................................... 8
Safety guard .......................................................................... 3, 8, 16, 31–32, 35, 42–49, 46, 48, 50–71, 95, 96,
98, 105, 111, 115, 116
maintenance ..................................................................... 53
strength ............................................................................ 53–57
Saucer wheels ...................................................................... 20
Saw gumming ....................................................................... 15
Sawing
concrete ............................................................................ 12, 102
wall ................................................................................... 16
Saws, portable ...................................................................... 15, 82
Scope of safety standard ...................................................... 1
Screw, mounting ................................................................... See Mounting
Segment ................................................................................ 99, 102
Segment attachment testing ................................................. 102–103
Segmental wheel .................................................................. 72, 79, 99, 100, 101, 102, 106, 107
Segments .............................................................................. 8, 88, 96, 100, 102, 106, 107
Setup ..................................................................................... 8
"Shall" .................................................................................... 9
Shapes of wheels .................................................................. 16–26

151
ANSI B7.1-2000
Shellac bonded wheels ......................................................... 6
Shelves, storage ................................................................... 28–30
Shield .................................................................................... 9
"Should" ................................................................................ 9
Shoulder grinding .................................................................. 114
Side grinding ......................................................................... 17, 22, 74, 113–114
Silicate bonded wheels ......................................................... 5
Sleeve adaptor flanges ......................................................... 76, 84, 86
Sleeve type flanges ............................................................... 3, 78
Slotting .................................................................................. 15
Snagging ............................................................................... 12, 15, 17, 83, 85, 99, 115
Snagging machines .............................................................. 63, 84, 99
Solvents ................................................................................ 27
Spacers ................................................................................. 79–80, 94
Spark arrester ....................................................................... See Adjustable tongue spark arrestor
Speed .................................................................................... 89–90, 98–104, 105–108, 116
marking ............................................................................. 102
operating .......................................................................... 99
rotational ........................................................................... 14
special .............................................................................. 100, 105–108
standard ........................................................................... 98–104, 99, 100, 117–118
testing ............................................................................... 100–102, 101
wheel operating ................................................................ 11, 50, 110
Speed adjustment control ..................................................... 104
Speed check of machines ..................................................... 103
Spindle .................................................................................. 9, 32–33, 38, 51, 57, 58, 59, 62, 65, 75, 76, 79,
80, 90, 91, 94, 96, 98, 110
diameter ........................................................................... 32
nose .................................................................................. 37
speed ................................................................................ 35–37, 89, 110
thread
direction ....................................................................... 94
length ........................................................................... 33
tolerance
3 inches and larger ...................................................... 32–33
up to 3 inches .............................................................. 32
Splash shield ......................................................................... 9
Station, work ......................................................................... 9
Stationary grinders ................................................................ 42–49, 57–69, 66, 70
Steel centered wheel ............................................................ 102, 106
Steel disc wheels .................................................................. 39–41, 73, 94
core thickness .................................................................. 74
Steel rings ............................................................................. 9, 115
Step-cutting procedure .......................................................... 73–74
Storage .................................................................................. 27, 27–30, 87, 108
Straight cup wheels ............................................................... 18
Straight flanges ..................................................................... 75
Straight relieved flanges ....................................................... 3, 78, 81, 82
Straight unrelieved flanges ................................................... 3, 21, 25, 72, 74, 83
Straight wheels ..................................................................... 17, 63
Strength of wheels ................................................................ 99, 113
Stresses ................................................................................ 72, 76, 77, 80, 112
Superabrasive wheels ........................................................... 101–102
Supervised ............................................................................ 9
Supervisor ............................................................................. 9
Supplier ................................................................................. 9
Surface feet per minute (SFPM) ........................................... 10, 32, 35, 36, 50, 58, 61, 70, 83, 84, 85, 89,
98–104, 100, 106, 110, 117
Surface grinder ..................................................................... 62

152
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Surface grinding .................................................................... 15, 17, 99
Swing frame grinder .............................................................. 63, 85, 99

T
Tables of maximum operating speeds .................................. 119
Tape winding ......................................................................... 10
Temperature .......................................................................... 27, 28
Tension speed ....................................................................... 90, 110
Terrazzo ................................................................................ 26, 72, 79, 99
Test for organic bonded wheels ............................................ 107
Test for vitrified bonded wheels ............................................. 106–107
Thread grinding wheels ......................................................... 99
Threaded hole cup wheels .................................................... 25
Threaded hole wheels ........................................................... 35, 37–39, 50, 93–94
Threaded insert ..................................................................... 72, 83
Tool and cutter grinding ......................................................... 15
Tool grinding .......................................................................... 99
Torque ................................................................................... 93
Transmission ......................................................................... 10
Traverse, rapid ...................................................................... 10
Trip ........................................................................................ 10
Tripdogs ................................................................................ 45–46
Truing .................................................................................... 11, 109, 113
Tuck pointing ......................................................................... 15
wheels .............................................................................. 25, 51
Type ...................................................................................... See Wheel type

U
Undercut of flanges ............................................................... 78
Unintended operation ............................................................ 11
User ....................................................................................... 6
Users of wheels and machines ............................................. 16, 98, 106, 108, 109

V
Valve ..................................................................................... 16
Variable speed machines ...................................................... 103, 110
Vibration ................................................................................ 111–112
Vibration test ......................................................................... 89
Vitrified bonded wheels ......................................................... 5, 87, 100–101, 102, 106–107

W
Wall saws and sawing ........................................................... 16, 65, 73
Water ..................................................................................... 27
Wet grinding .......................................................................... 113
Wheel
adaptors ........................................................................... 32, 90
breakage .......................................................................... 110
definitions ......................................................................... 16–26
diameter ........................................................................... 35–36
discard size ...................................................................... 115–116
limitations ......................................................................... 16–26, 35, 36
manufacturer .................................................................... 100–102, 105, 106, 109
operating speed ............................................................... 11
safety guard ..................................................................... 16
sleeves ............................................................................. 32, 90
specification ..................................................................... 116
speed ................................................................................ 35–36, 110

153
ANSI B7.1-2000
strength ............................................................................ 27, 98, 99, 105, 107
user .................................................................................. 16, 106
Wheel manufacturer .............................................................. 5
Wheel type
abrasive disc .................................................................... 72, 79, 89, 94, 99
abrasive flap disc ............................................................. 23
CBN .................................................................................. 79, 100, 102, 107
cone .................................................................................. 21, 72, 88, 99
cup .................................................................................... 72
cutting-off .......................................................................... 24, 51, 54, 64, 65, 66, 70, 72, 73–74, 74, 79, 82,
89, 90, 99, 102, 106
cylinder ............................................................................. 18, 72, 79, 96, 99
depressed center ............................................................. 22–23, 23, 53
diamond ............................................................................ 79, 89, 90, 99, 100, 102, 107
dish ................................................................................... 20
double recessed ............................................................... 19
flaring cup ......................................................................... 19
flute ................................................................................... 99
internal .............................................................................. 72, 77, 79
mounted ........................................................................... 25, 72, 79, 88, 95, 100, 101, 102, 106, 107,
117–118, 118
plug ................................................................................... 21, 88, 99
portable ............................................................................ 72
recessed ........................................................................... 22, 81
recessed one side ............................................................ 18
regulating ......................................................................... 14, 101
relieved ............................................................................. 22
saucer ............................................................................... 20
segmental ......................................................................... 72, 79, 88, 99, 100, 101, 102, 106, 107
steel centered ................................................................... 102, 106
straight .............................................................................. 17
straight cup ....................................................................... 18
thread grinding ................................................................. 99
threaded hole cup ............................................................ 25
tuck pointing ..................................................................... 25, 51
Type 1 straight wheels ..................................................... 16, 17, 25, 29, 50, 51, 54, 72, 73–74, 79, 99
Type 11 flaring cup wheels ............................................... 10, 19, 25, 29, 52, 55, 72, 77, 79, 93, 99
Type 11, modified ............................................................. 26
Type 12 dish wheels ......................................................... 20, 99
Type 13 saucer wheels .................................................... 20, 99
Type 2 cylinder wheels ..................................................... 16, 18, 79, 96, 99
Type 27 abrasive flap disc wheels ................................... 23, 74, 75, 77, 79, 96
Type 27A depressed center wheels ................................. 23, 72, 74, 79, 99
Type 29 wheels ................................................................ 23, 53, 55, 72, 74, 77, 79, 96
Type 5 recessed one side wheels .................................... 18, 29, 99
Type 6, modified ............................................................... 26
Type 6 straight cup wheels ............................................... 10, 18, 25, 52, 55, 72, 77, 79, 93, 99
Type 7 double recessed wheels ....................................... 19, 29, 99
Types 16, 17, 18, 18R and 19 cone and plug wheels ...... 21, 50, 93, 99
Types 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26 recessed ....................... 22, 29, 99
Types 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26 relieved ......................... 22, 29, 99
Types 27 and 28 depressed center wheels ...................... 22–23, 53, 55, 72, 74, 77, 79, 96, 99
valve seat ......................................................................... 50
Wheel type for machine ........................................................ 116
Wire winding .......................................................................... 10
Work cradle ........................................................................... 37
Work pressure ....................................................................... 118
Work rest ............................................................................... 114–115 See also Work support
work cradle ....................................................................... 37

154
 ANSI B7.1-2000
Work station .......................................................................... 9
Work support ......................................................................... 36–37, 46
cylindrical O.D. grinding ................................................... 37
off-hand grinding .............................................................. 37
Workpiece ............................................................................. 11

Z
Zone exhaust system ............................................................ 11

155